Fuji Xerox H825CDW Color Multifunction Printer User Manual
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Color Multifunction Printer
Contents
- 1. (Short-Term Confidential) User manual_1
- 2. (Short-Term Confidential) User manual_2
- 3. (Short-Term Confidential) User Manual-Important Info
- 4. (Short-Term Confidential) User Manual-Regulatory Info for USA
(Short-Term Confidential) User manual_1
Dell™ Color Cloud Multifunction Printer | H625cdw
Dell™ Color Cloud Multifunction Printer | H825cdw
Dell™ Color Smart Multifunction Printer | S2825cdn
User's Guide
Regulatory Model: H625cdw
H825cdw
S2825cdn
2
|
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
NOTE:
•A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of the printer.
CAUTION:
• A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not
followed.
WARNING:
• A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
© 2015 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.
Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of
Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell and the DELL logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, and Windows Vista are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Bonjour, iPhone, Macintosh, Mac OS, and AirPrint are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, and Photoshop are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities
claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in
trademarks and trade names other than its own.
About License
XML Paper Specification (XPS): This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by
Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such
intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369; DES: This
product includes software developed by Eric Young (eay@mincom.oz.au); AES: Copyright (c)
2003, Dr Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. This product uses published AES
software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms; TIFF (libtiff): Copyright (c)
1988-1997 Sam Leffler and Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.; ICC Profile (Little
cms): Copyright (c) 1998-2004 Marti Maria.
As for RSA BSAFE
This printer includes RSA
®
BSAFE
®
Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation.
ICC Profile Header
Copyright (c) 1994-1996 SunSoft, Inc.
Rights Reserved
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
|
3
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT, INC.
OR ITS PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without written
authorization from SunSoft Inc.
JPEG Library
Independent JPEG Group's free JPEG software
____________________
This package contains C software to implement JPEG image encoding, decoding, and
transcoding. JPEG is a standardized compression method for full-color and gray-scale images.
The distributed programs provide conversion between JPEG "JFIF" format and image files in
PBMPLUS PPM/PGM, GIF, BMP, and Targa file formats. The core compression and
decompression library can easily be reused in other programs, such as image viewers. The
package is highly portable C code; we have tested it on many machines ranging from PCs to
Crays.
We are releasing this software for both noncommercial and commercial use. Companies are
welcome to use it as the basis for JPEG-related products. We do not ask a royalty, although we
do ask for an acknowledgement in product literature (see the README file in the distribution for
details). We hope to make this software industrial-quality --- although, as with anything that's
free, we offer no warranty and accept no liability.
For more information, contact jpeg-info@jpegclub.org.
Contents of this directory
____________________
jpegsrc.vN.tar.gz contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Unix
format.
jpegsrN.zip contains source code, documentation, and test files for release N in Windows
format.
jpegaltui.vN.tar.gz contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Unix
format.
jpegaltuiN.zip contains source code for an alternate user interface for cjpeg/djpeg in Windows
format.
wallace.ps.gz is a PostScript file of Greg Wallace's introductory article about JPEG. This is an
update of the article that appeared in the April 1991 Communications of the ACM.
jpeg.documents.gz tells where to obtain the JPEG standard and documents about JPEG-related
file formats.
jfif.ps.gz is a PostScript file of the JFIF (JPEG File Interchange Format) format specification.
jfif.txt.gz is a plain text transcription of the JFIF specification; it's missing a figure, so use the
4
|
PostScript version if you can.
TIFFTechNote2.txt.gz is a draft of the proposed revisions to TIFF 6.0's JPEG support.
pm.errata.gz is the errata list for the first printing of the textbook "JPEG Still Image Data
Compression Standard" by Pennebaker and Mitchell.
jdosaobj.zip contains pre-assembled object files for JMEMDOSA.ASM. If you want to compile the
IJG code for MS-DOS, but don't have an assembler, these files may be helpful.
Math Library
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this
notice is preserved.
====================================================
copysignf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c: * Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
libtiff
Copyright (C) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright (C) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the
names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating
to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Zlib
zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library version 1.2.8, April 28th, 2013
Copyright (C) 1995-2013 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
|
5
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu
____________________
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS
This software and documentation are provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or
disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 and in
applicable FAR provisions: Dell Inc., One Dell Way, Round Rock, Texas, 78682, USA.
October 2015 Rev. A00
6
|Contents
Contents
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 2
About License 2
1 Before Beginning 20
About This Guide 21
Conventions 21
Finding Information 22
Product Features 23
Printer Overview 26
Front and Rear View 26
Front View 26
Rear View 27
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 28
Operator Panel 28
Status of Wi-Fi Button LED 30
Optional Accessory 30
2 Setting Up the Printer 31
Overview of the Printer Setup 32
Preparing to Set Up the Printer 33
Space Requirements 33
Securing the Printer 33
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line 34
Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack 34
Connecting the Printer to a Modem 35
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine 35
Turning On/Off the Printer 37
Turning On the Printer 37
Turning Off the Printer 38
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel 38
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer 44
Overview 44
Connecting to a Wireless Network 45
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only) 45
Connecting With WPS 46
Contents |
7
Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network 47
Changing the Wireless Settings 49
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network 49
Connecting the Ethernet Cable 49
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only) 50
Configuring With Other Methods 50
Connecting to a Computer With USB 51
Connecting the USB Cable 51
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only) 51
Configuring With Other Methods 52
Installing the Software for Windows
®
Computers 52
Installing the Software and Print Drivers with Dell Printer Easy Install 52
Installing the Software and Print Drivers When the Printer is Connected to the Network
or Computer 52
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD) 57
Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers 58
Installing the Software and Print Drivers 58
Adding a Printer Using USB Connection 58
Adding a Printer Using IP Printing 58
Adding a Printer Using Bonjour 59
Configuring With Optional Accessories 60
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices 61
Overview 61
Wi-Fi Direct 61
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct 61
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct 63
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network 63
Resetting the Passphrase 64
Resetting the PIN 64
Dell Document Hub 64
Android 64
iOS 64
Tap To Print/Scan 65
Preparations 65
Adding the Printer to the Mobile Device 65
Printing or Scanning 66
AirPrint 66
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer 66
Printing via AirPrint 67
Google Cloud Print 67
Preparing to Use the Printer With Google Cloud Print 67
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service 67
Registering the Printer to Your Google Account 68
Sharing the Printer With the Google Cloud Print Service 69
8
|Contents
Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print 70
Printing via Google Cloud Print 70
Mopria Print Service 71
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer 71
Printing via Mopria Print Service 71
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS) 72
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop 72
Setup Overview 72
Installing the Print Driver 72
Setting Up the Print Queue 72
Setting Up the Default Queue 73
Specifying the Printing Options 73
Uninstalling the Print Driver 74
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 74
Setup Overview 74
Installing the Print Driver 74
Setting Up the Print Queue 75
Setting Up the Default Queue 75
Specifying the Printing Options 76
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 76
Uninstalling the Print Driver 76
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS 77
Setup Overview 77
Installing the Print Driver 77
Setting the IP Address 80
Assigning an IP Address 80
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only) 80
When Using the Operator Panel 81
Verifying the IP Settings 81
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel 82
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report 82
3Using Your Printer 83
Using the Operator Panel 84
About the Home Screen 84
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel 85
Selecting the Item on the Screen 85
Scrolling the Screen or the Listed Items 85
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles 86
To Move the Tiles 86
To Add the Tiles 86
To Delete the Tiles 87
Contents |
9
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel 87
To Change the Keyboard Layout 87
Changing the Language 88
Panel Lock 88
Enabling the Panel Lock 88
Changing the Panel Lock Password 88
Disabling the Panel Lock 89
Setting the Power Saver Timer 89
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature 89
Understanding the System Menus 90
Report / List 90
System Settings 90
Panel Settings 90
PCL Fonts List 90
PCL Macros List 90
PS Fonts List 90
PDF Fonts List 90
Job History 90
Error History 91
Print Meter 91
Color Test Page 91
Protocol Monitor 91
Speed Dial 91
Address Book 91
Server Address 91
Fax Activity 91
Fax Pending 91
Stored Documents 91
Printing a Report / List 92
Wi-Fi | WPS 92
Wi-Fi 92
Wi-Fi Direct 92
WPS (Connect via PBC) 92
WPS (Connect via PIN) 92
Paired Device 92
Admin Settings 92
Phone Book 93
PCL 93
PS 95
PDF 96
Network 97
Ethernet 101
Fax Settings 104
System Settings 109
10
|Contents
Maintenance 115
Secure Settings 117
USB Settings 120
Default Settings 121
Copy Defaults 121
Fax Defaults 121
Scan Defaults 121
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults 122
Tray Management 122
Tray Settings 122
Tray P riority 123
Language Settings 123
Panel Language 123
Keyboard Layout 123
Resetting Defaults 123
Understanding the Job Menus 125
Print 125
Secure Print 125
Private Mailbox 125
Public Mailbox 125
Proof Print 126
Secure Fax Receive 126
Tile Settings 126
Copy 126
Quantity 126
Darken/Lighten 126
Output Color 127
Select Tray 127
2 Sided Copying 127
Sharpness 127
Reduce/Enlarge 127
Original Size 127
Original Type 128
Collation 128
2-Up 128
Color Saturation 128
Margin 128
Auto Exposure 128
Save Settings 128
ID Copy 128
Save Settings 129
Scan to Email 129
Scan to Network Folder 129
Scan to USB 129
Contents |
11
Scan to Computer 130
Tile Settings 130
Scan Settings 130
Save Settings 132
Fax 132
Fax Settings 132
Save Settings 133
Print PDF/TIFF 133
Print JPEG 133
Print Settings 134
Dell Document Hub 135
Search for Files 135
Browse for Files 135
Scan 136
Smart OCR Scan 136
E-mail Me 137
Business Card Reader 138
Add App 138
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 139
Preparing to Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 139
Setting Up Internet Explorer
®
139
Confirming the Menu on the Operator Panel 139
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 140
Page Display Format 140
Top Frame 140
Left Frame 141
Right Frame 142
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items 142
Details of the Menu Items 143
Printer Status 145
Printer Jobs 146
Printer Settings 146
Print Server Settings 159
Copy Printer Settings 179
Print Volume 179
Address Book 181
Tray Management 185
Print Media Guidelines 187
Supported Print Media 187
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 187
Tray1 188
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder 189
Supported Paper Weight 190
12
|Contents
Unacceptable Print Media 190
Recommended Print Media 190
Recommended Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads 191
Recommended Pre-Punched Print Media 191
Recommended Envelopes 191
Recommended Labels 192
Print Media Storage Guidelines 192
Loading Print Media 193
Before Loading 193
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder 193
Loading Envelopes in the Tray1 197
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) 198
Loading Envelopes in the MPF 200
Loading Labels in the MPF 201
Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper 202
Linking Trays 202
Loading Documents 204
Before Loading Documents in the DADF 204
Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 204
Loading a Document on the Document Glass 205
4 Printing, Copying, Scanning, Faxing, and Dell Document Hub
207
Printing 208
Sending a Job to Print 208
Canceling a Print Job 208
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel 208
Canceling a Job From a Computer 209
Duplex Printing 209
Using Duplex Print 209
Using Booklet Print 210
Using Stored Print 211
Overview 211
Procedures for Printing Stored Print 213
Printing From USB Flash Drive 214
Supported USB Flash Drive 214
Supported File Formats 215
Printing a PDF/TIFF or JPEG File in a USB Flash Drive 215
Printer Settings 216
Copying 217
Making Copies From the Document Glass 217
Contents |
13
Making Copies From the DADF 217
Using the ID Copy 218
Changing the Default Copy Settings 218
Scanning 220
Scanning Overview 220
Tips for Easy Network Scanning 221
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection 221
Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection 221
Printer Setup for Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD) 221
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer 222
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD) 223
Preparations for Scanning From the Computer 224
Scanning From the Computer 224
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver 224
Scanning Using the Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver 225
Scanning an Image From the Drawing Software 226
Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct 226
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct 227
Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP 227
Overview 227
Overview for Scanning to an FTP Server 228
Overview for Scanning to a Shared Folder Using SMB 228
Setting a User Account (SMB Only) 228
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only) 229
Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book 231
Sending the Scanned Data on the Network 236
Scanning to a USB Flash Drive 237
Procedures 237
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data 237
Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail 238
Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account 238
Setting the DNS Server Address 238
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server 239
Registering a Destination E-Mail Address to Address Book 240
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data 241
Managing the Scanner 242
Port Settings 242
Password Settings 243
Changing the Default Scan Setting 244
Faxing 245
Initial Settings 245
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy Install 245
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Operator Panel 246
14
|Contents
Changing the Fax Settings 246
Sending a Fax 246
Sending a Fax From Memory 246
Sending a Fax Manually 248
Confirming Transmissions 248
Automatic Redialing 248
Sending a Delayed Fax 249
Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer 249
Overview 250
Procedure 250
Automatic Dialing 254
Speed Dialing 254
Group Dialing 255
Printing a Speed Dial List 256
Phone Book 257
Receiving a Fax 257
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes 257
Receiving a Fax Automatically 258
Receiving a Fax Manually 258
Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) 258
Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode 259
Receiving Faxes in the Memory 260
Polling Receive 260
Reports Related to Fax 260
Changing the Default Fax Setting 261
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) 262
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell Document Hub 262
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub 262
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub 263
Icons for the Dell Document Hub Screens 263
When the Favorite List Screen Is Displayed When You Tap the Tile on the Dell Document
Hub Screen 264
Returning to the Home Screen 264
Logging Out From the Printer 264
Searching for and Printing Files 264
Browsing and Printing Files 265
Scanning 267
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) 268
Sending the Scanned Data to Yourself via E-Mail 269
Sending a Scanned Data of a Business Card to Yourself via E-Mail 270
5Know Your Printer 271
Understanding the Software of Your Printer 272
Contents |
15
Overview 272
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool 272
Printer Status Window 273
Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget 273
Tool Box 273
Address Book Editor 273
Dell™ Supplies Management System 273
User Setup Disk Creating Tool 273
App Manager 274
Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh 275
Status Monitor Widget 275
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget 275
Installing the Status Monitor Widget 276
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget 276
Printer Status Window 276
Order Window 278
Preferences 279
Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux 279
Status Monitor Console 279
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console 280
Installing the Status Monitor Console 280
Starting the Status Monitor Console 280
Printer Selection Window 280
Printer Status Window 281
Dell Supplies Management System Window 282
Service Tag Window 284
Settings Window 284
Software Update 285
User Authentication 286
Creating and Editing the User Accounts 286
Creating a New User Account 286
Editing the User Account 287
Deleting the User Account 287
Logging In to the User Account 287
Logging In Using the Touch Panel 288
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card 288
Logging In Using the Local Authentication or Remote Authentication 288
Logging Out 289
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization 290
Adding a New Tile 290
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles 290
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings 290
16
|Contents
Using the Address Book and Phone Book 292
Types of Address Books 292
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books 292
Using Operator Panel of the Printer 293
Using Address Book Editor 293
Address Book Panel 293
Editing an Entry 293
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 294
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book 294
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server 294
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 294
Setting Authentication Type 294
Setting LDAP Server 295
Setting LDAP User Mapping 296
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server Address Book 297
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book 297
Using Digital Certificates 298
Managing Certificates 298
Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication 298
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) 299
Importing a Digital Certificate 299
Setting a Digital Certificate 300
Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate 300
Deleting a Digital Certificate 301
Exporting a Digital Certificate 301
Setting the Features 302
Setting the Certificate in the IPsec Digital Signature Mode 302
Setting the SSL-Use Server Certificate (HTTP/IPP) 303
Setting SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication 303
Setting LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication 303
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (EAP-TLS) 304
Setting for Wireless LAN WPA-Enterprise (PEAPV0-MS-CHAPV2, EAP-TTLS PAP, EAP-
TTLS CHAP) 305
Setting Client Certificate for IEEE 802.1x (EAP-TLS) 306
Understanding Printer Messages 307
Status Codes 307
Error Messages 314
Specifications 317
Operating System Compatibility 317
Power Supply 317
Dimensions 317
Weight 318
Contents |
17
Memory 318
Page Description Language (PDL)/Emulation, Operating System, and Interface 318
Management Information Base (MIB) Compatibility 319
Environment 319
Operation 319
Print Quality Guarantee 319
Storage 319
Altitude 319
Cables 319
Print Specifications 319
Copy Specifications 320
Scanner Specifications 322
Fax Specifications 322
Wireless Connection Specifications 323
6 Maintaining Your Printer 324
Maintaining Your Printer 325
Checking the Status of Supplies 325
E-mail Alert Setting 325
Conserving Supplies 325
Ordering Supplies 325
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool 325
Using the Dell Supplies Management System 326
Storing Print Media 326
Storing Consumables 326
Replacing the Toner Cartridges 327
Removing the Toner Cartridge 327
Installing a Toner Cartridge 328
Replacing the Drum Cartridges 329
Removing the Drum Cartridge 329
Installing a Drum Cartridge 332
Replacing the Waste Toner Box 334
Removing the Waste Toner Box 334
Installing a Waste Toner Box 336
Cleaning Inside the Printer 337
Cleaning the Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor 337
Cleaning the LED Print Head 338
Cleaning the Scanner 341
Cleaning the DADF Feed Rollers 343
Moving the Printer 343
Removing Options 345
Removing the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder 345
18
| Contents
7 Troubleshooting 347
Troubleshooting 348
Clearing Jams 348
Identifying the Location of Paper Jams 348
Clearing Paper Jams From the DADF 348
Clearing Paper Jams From the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) and Tray1 351
Clearing Paper Jams From Inside the Rear Cover 353
Clearing Paper Jams From the Optional 550-Sheet Feeder 357
Basic Printer Problems 358
Display Problems 359
Printing Problems 359
Print Quality Problems 360
Light Printout 361
Smearing Toner/Loose Toner 362
Random Spots/Blurred Images 363
Blank Printout 363
Streaks 364
Black Printout (Partial or Entire Page) 365
Equally Spaced Colored Dots 365
Vertical Blanks 366
Mottle 367
Ghosting 367
Light-Induced Fatigue 368
Fog 369
Bead-Carry-Out (BCO) 369
Jagged Characters 370
Horizontal Bands 370
Diagonal Lines 371
Wrinkled/Stained Printout 371
Damage on the Leading Edge of Printout 372
Jam/Alignment Problems 372
Incorrect Margins on the Top and Side 373
Disorganized Color Registration 373
Skewed Images 373
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Misfeed Jam 374
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Misfeed Jam 374
Regi Jam (Exit Sensor On JAM) 375
Tray1/Optional 550-Sheet Feeder Multi-feed Jam 375
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) Multi-feed Jam 376
Noise 376
Copy Problems 376
Fax Problems 377
Scanning Problems 378
Contents |
19
Digital Certificate Problems 380
Wireless Problems 381
Problems With Installed Optional 550-sheet feeder 382
Wi-Fi Direct Problems 382
Scanner Driver/Printer Utility Problems 383
Other Problems 383
Contacting Service 383
Appendix 384
Appendix 385
Dell™ Technical Support Policy 385
Online Services 385
Warranty and Return Policy 385
Recycling Information 385
Contacting Dell 385
20
|
1
Before Beginning
About This Guide 21
Finding Information 22
Product Features 23
Printer Overview 26
About This Guide |
21
About This Guide
Click the bookmarks to the left for information on the features, optional accessory, and
operation of your Dell H625cdw, Dell H825cdw, or Dell S2825cdn. For details about
other documentation included with your printer, see "Finding Information."
NOTE:
•In this manual, Dell H625cdw, Dell H825cdw, or Dell S2825cdn is referred to as the "printer."
•In this manual, the procedures for the computer are explained using Microsoft
®
Windows
®
7 unless
stated otherwise.
•The images and screenshots used in this manual are those of the Dell H825cdw unless otherwise
mentioned.
Conventions
The following describe the meaning of the symbols and fonts used in this manual:
Item Description
Bold texts •Names of hardware button on the operator panel.
•Menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the
computer screen.
Texts in Courier New font •Menus and messages displayed on the touch panel.
•Screen name on the touch panel.
•Characters entered from the computer.
•Directory paths.
< > •Key on the keyboard of the computer.
•Indicates a process flow.
" " •Cross references in this manual.
•Characters entered from the operator panel.
•Messages displayed on the computer screen.
22
|Finding Information
Finding Information
What are you looking for? Find it here
Drivers and manuals for my printer Software and Documentation disc:
The Software and Documentation disc contains manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. You can use the Software and
Documentation disc to install drivers and software, and refer to
manuals.
Readme files may be included on your Software and Documentation
disc to provide last-minute updates about technical changes to the
printer or advanced technical reference material for experienced
users or technicians.
How to set up my printer
How to use my printer
Setup Guide
Safety information
Warranty information
Important Information
WARNING:
• Read and follow all safety instructions in the Important
Information prior to setting up and operating the printer.
Express Service Code and Service
Tag
The Express Service Code and Service Tag are located inside the front
cover of the printer.
Latest drivers for my printer
Documentation for my printer
Visit www.dell.com/support.
Answers to technical service and
support questions
Visit www.dell.com/support. Select your region, and fill in the
requested details to access help tools and information.
www.dell.com/support provides several online tools, including:
•Solutions — Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles from
technicians, and online courses
•Upgrades — Upgrade information for components, such as the
print drivers
•Customer Care — Contact information, order status, warranty, and
repair information
•Downloads — Drivers
•Manuals— Printer documentation and product specifications
Service Tag
ABCD123
Express Service Code
01234567890
Product Features |
23
Product Features
This chapter describes the product features and indicates their links.
Dell Document Hub App
Easily access and share documents, images and
digital content with the Dell Document Hub App.
This innovative cloud collaboration solution
connects your printer and devices to popular cloud
services, providing a flexible and secure way to
collaborate from virtually anywhere. Using your
computer or mobile device, you can search file
across multiple cloud services simultaneously to
print documents or you can scan documents
directly to the cloud using the app. For
downloading the app, please visit Microsoft
®
Windows Store, Google
®
Play Store and Apple
®
App
Store. For more information about using Dell
Document Hub, see the FAQs in
Dell.com/documenthub.
Dell Printer Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
Dell Printer Hub is a program that monitorT and
informT you of the printer status and allowT you to
customize the printer settings. The program also
notifJFT you of the firmware/software updates. For
convenient use, you can access the Dell Document
Hub from the Dell Printer Hub. Dell Printer Hub is
included on your Software and Documentation
disc and is installed with the manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. For more information,
open the program and click on the top right of
the main window to see the FAQs.
Dell Print Management Tool
(Dell S2825cdn)
Dell Print Management Tool is a program that
monitorT and informT you of the printer status and
allowT you to customize the printer settings. The
program also notifJFT you of the firmware/
software updates. Dell Print Management Tool is
included on your Software and Documentation disc
and is installed with the manuals, drivers, and
software for the printer. For more information,
open the program and click on the top right of
the main window to see the FAQs.
Converting and storing with Dell Document
Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
You can scan hard copy documents and store
them directly in your preferred cloud storage
service with the Dell Document Hub. You can also
convert hard copy documents into editable digital
content before sending them to the cloud storage.
See "Scanning the Document Using Optical
Character Recognition (OCR)."
24
|Product Features
Printing with Dell Document Hub
(Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw)
You can easily locate and print documents stored
in cloud storage with the Dell Document Hub. You
can also search for files across multiple clouds
storage services simultaneously.
See "Searching for and Printing Files."
USB Direct Print
You can print files directly from a USB flash drive
without requiring you to start your computer and a
program with the USB Direct Print feature.
See "Printing From USB Flash Drive."
ID Copy
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side
of a single sheet of paper in its original size by a
simple operation with the ID Copy feature.
See "Using the ID Copy."
Scan to Email
You can send scanned data by e-mail as an
attachment with the Scan to Email feature. After
scanning, select destination e-mail addresses from
the address book on the printer or server or enter
the address from the touch panel of the printer.
See "Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail."
Scan to Network Folder
You can transfer scanned data to a PC or a server
via Server Message Block (SMB) or FTP without
software. Although prior registration of the
destination FTP server or PC on the address book is
required, it helps save your time.
See "Scanning to a Computer or Server With
SMB/FTP."
Scan to USB
You don't need a PC to save scanned data to a USB
flash drive with the Scan to USB feature. Specify the
USB flash drive inserted into the printer's port as a
data saving location when you scan data.
See "Scanning to a USB Flash Drive."
Product Features |
25
Scanning From the Document Glass
You can scan the pages of a book or a brochure
from the document glass.
See "Making Copies From the Document Glass."
Scanning From the Duplex Automatic Document
Feeder (DADF)
You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the
DADF.
See "Making Copies From the DADF."
26
| Printer Overview
Printer Overview
Front and Rear View
Front View
1 Output Tray Extension 7 Right Side Cover
2 Front USB Port 8 Front Cover
3Operator Panel 9Tray1
4 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 10 Optional 550-Sheet Feeder (Tray2)
5 Drum Cartridges 11 Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
6 Waste Toner Box 12 Toner Cartridges
4
7891011
12
5
6
321
Printer Overview |
27
Rear View
1 Phone Connector 6 "Blue" Plug
2 Wall Jack Connector 7 Duplex Unit
3 Ethernet Port 8 Fusing Unit
4USB Port 9Rear Cover
5 Power Connector
2
3
5
1
4
8
6
7
9
28
| Printer Overview
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)
NOTE:
•Pull out the document stopper to prevent the document from falling off the printer.
Operator Panel
Dell H625cdw/Dell H825cdw
Dell S2825cdn
1 DADF Cover 5 Document Feeder Tray
2 Document Guides 6 Document Stopper
3 DADF Chute Cover 7 Document Output Tray
4 Document Glass 8 DADF Feed Rollers
12
3
4
5
6
7
8
134578 962
12 101314 11
Printer Overview |
29
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
NOTE:
•Moving to a different menu or returning to a previous screen cancels the current entry or setting.
Make sure to select OK to save the current entry or setting.
1 (Home) button Moves to the Home screen.
2 (Log In/Out) button Logs out if pressed while the user is logged in.
3 Touch Panel Specifies the settings by directly tapping the screen.
Displays various settings, instructions, and error messages.
4 Ready/Error LED Shows a green light when the printer is ready and a blinking green
light when data is being received.
Shows an amber light when an error occurs and a blinking amber
light when an unrecoverable print error occurs.
5 Number Pad Enters numbers and characters.
6 (Wi-Fi) button* Shows a white light when the Wi-Fi
®
is activated and blinks in certain
conditions. See "Status of Wi-Fi Button LED."
7 (Redial/Pause) button Re-dials a telephone number.
Inserts a pause into a telephone number. When the
(Redial/Pause) button is pressed, "-" appears on the touch panel.
8 (Copy) button Starts copying the document. Effective only from the Home screen
while you are logged in to the printer.
9 (Power) button Turns on and off the printer. Also enters or exits the Power Saver
mode. When the printer is not used for a while, it enters the Power
Saver mode to reduce power consumption. The white light will flash
in a breathing pattern (gradually flashes on and off) when the Power
Saver mode is active.
10 (NFC) reader* Starts communication between the printer and an NFC card or a
mobile device with the NFC function when the card or the device is
tapped to or waved over the reader.
11 / (Speed Dial 1/
Speed Dial 2) button
Dials the number registered as "001" or "002" respectively of the FAX
Speed Dial. Effective only when the Home screen is displayed.
12 (Delete) button Deletes numbers and characters.
13 (Job Status) button Moves to the Job Status screen. From this screen, you can check
or cancel active jobs.
14 (Information) button Moves to the Information screen. You can access various
information and settings menu, check consumable levels and
network status, and print various types of reports and lists.
134578 92
121314 11
30
| Printer Overview
Status of Wi-Fi Button LED
Optional Accessory
The optional 550-sheet feeder is available for the printer.
To install the optional 550-sheet feeder, refer to the installation instruction that comes
with the optional 550-sheet feeder.
(Wi-Fi) LED Printer Status
Off Wi-Fi has been turned off.
Connecting to the network via Ethernet cable
Entering the power saver mode
On Wireless link established
Blinking Searching/Connecting with wireless LAN access point or router
Blinking slowly Wi-Fi is turned on but not connected to an access point or router.
|
31
2
Setting Up the Printer
Overview of the Printer Setup 32
Preparing to Set Up the Printer 33
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line 34
Turning On/Off the Printer 37
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer 44
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices 61
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing
System (CUPS) 72
Setting the IP Address 80
32
| Overview of the Printer Setup
Overview of the Printer Setup
The following are the procedures necessary to set up the printer.
Hardware preparations/Initial settings
Connections/Printer setup
"Preparing to Set Up the Printer"
"Turning On/Off the Printer"
"Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel"
"Connecting Your Printer to a Computer"
"Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line"
"Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices"
Preparing to Set Up the Printer |
33
Preparing to Set Up the Printer
Space Requirements
Provide enough room to open the printer trays, covers, and optional accessory, and for
proper ventilation.
Securing the Printer
To protect the printer from theft, you can use a Kensington lock.
Attach the Kensington lock to the security slot of the printer.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the Kensington lock.
220 mm/8.66 inches
499 mm/19.65 inches
250 mm/9.84 inches
300 mm/
11.81 inches
420 mm/16.54 inches
180 mm/7.09 inches
180 mm/
7.09 inches
500 mm/
19.69 inches
Security Slot Security Slot
34
| Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
CAUTION:
• Do not connect the printer directly to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL). This may damage the
printer. To use a DSL, you are required to use an appropriate DSL filter. Contact your service
provider for the DSL filter.
Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack
To connect the printer to a telephone line, connect a telephone line cord into the wall
jack connector on the rear of the printer. Connect the other end of the cord into an
active wall jack.
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France, and Switzerland), and a "Yellow" terminator is
supplied, perform the following procedure:
1Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.
2Insert the "Yellow" terminator into the phone connector.
To the wall jack
"Blue" plug
Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line |
35
Connecting the Printer to a Modem
You can connect the printer to a computer with a modem on the same telephone line as
the printer.
Make sure that the modem is connected to an active wall jack connector, and then
connect a telephone line cord into the phone connector on the modem. Connect the
other end of the cord into the wall jack connector on the rear of the printer.
NOTE:
•When using the fax function of the printer, turn off the fax-receive feature of the computer
modem.
•Do not use the computer modem if the printer is sending or receiving a fax.
•To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and
fax program.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
If you share a telephone line with voice calls and fax, you can connect a telephone or an
answering machine to the printer to take the voice calls.
1Make sure that a telephone line is connected to the printer.
See "Connecting the Printer to the Wall Jack."
2Remove the "Blue" plug from the phone connector.
"Yellow" terminator
Phone
connector
To an active
wall jack
Wall jack connector
36
| Connecting Your Printer to a Telephone Line
3Connect a telephone or answering machine line cord into the phone connector on
the rear of the printer. Connect the other end of the cord into an external telephone
or answering machine.
"Blue" plug
To an external telephone
or answering machine
Turning On/Off the Printer |
37
Turning On/Off the Printer
NOTE:
•The images used in this chapter are those of the Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw unless otherwise
mentioned.
Turning On the Printer
WARNING:
• Do not use extension cords or power strips.
• The printer should not be connected to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system.
1Connect the power cord to the power connector on the rear of the printer, and then
to an electrical outlet.
2Press the (Power) button on the operator panel.
38
| Turning On/Off the Printer
Turning Off the Printer
NOTE:
•The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
Press and hold the (Power) button and select Power Off displayed on the operator
panel.
Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel
You need to set the printer language, country, clock date, time, and fax settings when
you turn on the printer for the first time.
When you turn the printer on, the wizard screen to perform the initial setup appears on
the touch panel. Perform the following procedure to set the initial settings.
NOTE:
•If you do not start configuring the initial settings, the printer restarts in 3 minutes, and the Home
screen appears on the touch panel. After that, you can set the following initial setup by enabling
the Power On Wizard on the touch panel from:
The (Information) button Tools tab Admin Settings System Settings
General Power On Wizard.
You can also set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1Turn on the printer.
2Tap until desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
3Tap Next.
4Tap Date & Time.
Geographic Region Time Zone
Africa (UTC) Accra, Bamako, Dakar, Nouakchott
(UTC) Casablanca
(UTC +01:00) Algiers, Douala, Libreville, Luanda
(UTC +01:00) Tunis
(UTC +01:00) Windhoek
(UTC +02:00) Cairo
(UTC +02:00) Harare, Johannesburg, Kinshasa, Tripoli
(UTC +03:00) Addis Ababa, Khartoum, Mogadishu, Nairobi
Turning On/Off the Printer |
39
Americas (UTC -10:00) Adak
(UTC -09:00) Alaska
(UTC -08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -08:00) Tijuana
(UTC -07:00) Arizona, Dawson Creek, Sonora
(UTC -07:00) Chihuahua, Mazatlan
(UTC -07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Cancun, Mexico City, Monterrey
(UTC -06:00) Central America
(UTC -06:00) Central Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -06:00) Saskatchewan
(UTC -05:00) Atikokan, Resolute
(UTC -05:00) Bogota, Lima, Panama, Quito
(UTC -05:00) Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Port-au-Prince
(UTC -05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
(UTC -05:00) Grand Turk
(UTC -05:00) Havana
(UTC -04:30) Caracas
(UTC -04:00) Asuncion
(UTC -04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada)
(UTC -04:00) Blanc-Sablon
(UTC -04:00) Caribbean Islands
(UTC -04:00) Cuiaba
(UTC -04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, Manaus
(UTC -04:00) Thule
(UTC -03:30) St. John's
(UTC -03:00) Brasilia, Cayenne, Paramaribo
(UTC -03:00) Buenos Aires
(UTC -03:00) Greenland
(UTC -03:00) Miquelon
(UTC -03:00) Montevideo
(UTC -02:00) Noronha
Antarctica (UTC -04:00) Palmer Archipelago, Santiago
(UTC -03:00) Rothera
(UTC +03:00) Syowa
(UTC +06:00) Mawson, Vostok
(UTC +07:00) Davis
(UTC +08:00) Casey
(UTC +10:00) Dumont d'Urville
(UTC +12:00) McMurdo
Geographic Region Time Zone
40
| Turning On/Off the Printer
Asia (UTC +02:00) Amman
(UTC +02:00) Beirut
(UTC +02:00) Damascus
(UTC +02:00) Jerusalem
(UTC +02:00) Nicosia
(UTC +02:00) Palestine
(UTC +03:00) Aden, Baghdad, Qatar, Riyadh
(UTC +03:30) Tehran
(UTC +04:00) Baku
(UTC +04:00) Dubai, Muscat, Tbilisi
(UTC +04:00) Yerevan
(UTC +04:30) Kabul
(UTC +05:00) Aqtau, Aqtobe, Ashgabat, Samarkand
(UTC +05:00) Ekaterinburg
(UTC +05:00) Karachi
(UTC +05:30) Colombo, Kolkata
(UTC +05:45) Kathmandu
(UTC +06:00) Almaty, Bishkek, Dhaka, Thimphu
(UTC +06:00) Novosibirsk, Omsk
(UTC +06:30) Yangon (Rangoon)
(UTC +07:00) Bangkok, Ho Chi Minh, Hovd, Jakarta
(UTC +07:00) Krasnoyarsk
(UTC +08:00) Chongqing, Hong Kong, Shanghai
(UTC +08:00) Irkutsk
(UTC +08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Makassar, Manila, Singapore
(UTC +08:00) Taipei
(UTC +08:00) Ulaan Baatar
(UTC +09:00) Dili, Jayapura
(UTC +09:00) Pyongyang
(UTC +09:00) Seoul
(UTC +09:00) Tokyo
(UTC +09:00) Yakutsk
(UTC +10:00) Sakhalin, Vladivostok
(UTC +11:00) Magadan
(UTC +12:00) Anadyr, Kamchatka
Atlantic Ocean (UTC -04:00) Bermuda
(UTC -04:00) Stanley
(UTC -02:00) South Georgia Island
(UTC -01:00) Azores, Scoresbysund
(UTC -01:00) Cape Verde
(UTC) Reykjavik
Geographic Region Time Zone
Turning On/Off the Printer |
41
5Tap until the desired geographic region appears, and then tap the desired
geographic region.
6Tap until the desired time zone appears, and then tap the desired time zone.
Australia (UTC +08:00) Perth
(UTC +08:45) Eucla
(UTC +09:30) Adelaide
(UTC +09:30) Darwin
(UTC +10:00) Brisbane, Lindeman
(UTC +10:00) Hobart, Melbourne, Sydney
(UTC +10:30) Lord Howe Island
Europe (UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
(UTC +01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna
(UTC +01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Prague
(UTC +01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris
(UTC +01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb
(UTC +02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul
(UTC +02:00) Helsinki, Kiev, Riga, Sofia
(UTC +02:00) Kaliningrad, Minsk
(UTC +03:00) Moscow
(UTC +04:00) Samara
Indian Ocean (UTC +03:00) Antananarivo, Comoro Islands, Mayotte
(UTC +04:00) Mahe, Reunion
(UTC +04:00) Mauritius
(UTC +05:00) Kerguelen, Maldives
(UTC +06:00) Chagos
(UTC +06:30) Cocos Islands
(UTC +07:00) Christmas Island
Pacific Ocean (UTC -11:00) Midway Island, Niue, Samoa
(UTC -10:00) Cook Islands, Hawaii, Tahiti
(UTC -09:30) Marquesas Islands
(UTC -09:00) Gambier Islands
(UTC -08:00) Pitcairn Islands
(UTC -06:00) Easter Island
(UTC -06:00) Galapagos Islands
(UTC +09:00) Palau
(UTC +10:00) Guam, Port Moresby, Saipan
(UTC +11:00) Efate, Guadalcanal, Kosrae
(UTC +11:30) Norfolk Island
(UTC +12:00) Auckland
(UTC +12:00) Fiji, Marshall Islands
(UTC +12:45) Chatham
(UTC +13:00) Tongatapu
(UTC +14:00) Kiritimati
Geographic Region Time Zone
42
| Turning On/Off the Printer
7Tap OK Date.
8Select a date format from the menu displayed by selecting Format.
9After tapping the box under Year, tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the
desired value.
Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Month and Day.
10 Tap OK Time.
11 Select the time format from 12 Hour or 24 Hour. If you select 12 Hour, select AM
or PM.
12 After tapping the box under Hour, use the number pad to enter the desired value.
Repeat this step to enter the desired value for Minute.
13 Tap OK Next.
14 Perform either of the following:
To set Fax settings, select Yes, Setup FAX and perform the following procedure:
aEnter the fax number of the printer using the number pad.
bTap Country.
cTap until the desired country appears, and then tap the desired country.
The default paper size is automatically set when you select a country.
Australia A4
Austria A4
Belgium A4
Canada Letter
Colombia Letter
Denmark A4
Finland A4
France A4
Germany A4
Ireland A4
Italy A4
Malaysia A4
Mexico Letter
Netherlands A4
New Zealand A4
Norway A4
Singapore A4
South Africa A4
Spain A4
Sweden A4
Switzerland A4
Thailand A4
United Kingdom A4
United States Letter
Turning On/Off the Printer |
43
dTap Next.
To end the settings, select No, I'll Do It Later.
15 When the Setup Complete (Congratulations, setup is complete.)
screen appears, tap OK.
The printer restarts.
Unknown Letter
44
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
You can connect the printer directly to your computer with USB, or connect the printer
to a wireless or wired network.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Overview
The following are the simple procedures recommended to connect the printer.
For wireless connection procedures other than the above, see "Connecting to a Wireless
Network."
Wireless connection
Necessary preparations
Check the settings of your access point or wireless router.
Windows
®
Dell Printer Easy Install
Macintosh
WPS-PBC settings Drivers and
software installation
"Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows
®
Only)"
"Connecting With WPS" "Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers"
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
45
Connecting to a Wireless Network
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only)
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
•Make sure that there is no cable connected between the printer and your computer.
2On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
3Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find your printer.
Wired connection
(Ethernet or USB)
Necessary preparations
Connect an Ethernet cable or a USB cable into the port on the rear of the printer.
"Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network"
"Connecting to a Computer With USB"
Windows
®
Dell Printer Easy Install
Macintosh
Drivers and software installation
"Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install
(Windows
®
Only)"
"Installing the Software for Macintosh
Computers"
46
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
4After the printer is found, click Install to complete the setup.
Connecting With WPS
WPS-PBC and WPS-PIN are simple methods to setup wireless connection.
For WPS-PBC, press the button provided on your access point or wireless router, and
then perform WPS-PBC setting on the operator panel. This setting is available only when
the access point supports WPS.
For WPS-PIN, enter PIN assignments to your printer and computer. This setting,
performed on an access point, is available only when the access points of your wireless
router support WPS.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•Make sure to connect the printer to a wireless network and disconnect the Ethernet cable.
•Before starting WPS-PBC, check where the WPS button (button name may vary) is located on the
wireless LAN access point. For details about WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer
to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point.
•For WPS operation on the wireless LAN access point, refer to the manual supplied with the wireless
LAN access point.
WPS-PBC (Using the Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) Button)
1Press and hold the (Wi-Fi) button for more than 2 seconds.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
NOTE:
•If you press the (Wi-Fi) button for less than 1 second, the Wi-Fi | WPS screen appears.
•Make sure that the message Push WPS Button on router is displayed, and then start the
WPS-PBC on the wireless LAN access point (Registrar) within 2 minutes.
2Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
WPS-PBC (Using the Touch Panel)
When using the (Wi-Fi) button:
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2Tap WPS (Connect via PBC).
3Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
When using the (Information) button:
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi WPS Setup
Push Button Configuration Start Configuration.
3Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
47
Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
WPS-PIN
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2Tap WPS (Connect via PIN).
3Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
NOTE:
•Write down the eight-digit PIN code displayed on the touch panel. To print the PIN code, tap
Print PIN Code.
•Make sure that the message Operate Wireless Router is displayed, and then enter the PIN
code into the wireless LAN access point (Registrar).
Manually Connecting to a Wireless Network
Connect to the wireless network using the SSID of your access point or wireless router.
For details about the SSID of your access point or wireless router, contact your network
administrator.
Auto SSID Setup
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
The printer searches for access points on the wireless network.
4Tap until the desired access point appears, and then select the access point.
If the desired access point does not appear, proceed to "Manual SSID Setup."
NOTE:
•Some SSIDs are hidden and may not be displayed. If the SSID is not detected, turn on SSID
broadcast from the router.
5Tap Next.
6Enter the WEP key or passphrase.
If the encryption type of the selected access point is WEP in step 4:
aTap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
bTap OK.
If the encryption type of the selected access point is WPA™, WPA2™, or Mixed in
step 4:
aTap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
48
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
bTap OK.
NOTE:
•A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on access points or routers. For
details, refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router.
7Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
Manual SSID Setup
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Setup
Wizard.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the Manual SSID Setup check box, and then tap Next.
4Enter the SSID, and then tap Next.
5Select the network mode from Infrastructure and Ad-hoc according to your
environment, and then tap Next.
If you select Infrastructure, proceed to step 6.
If you select Ad-hoc, proceed to step 7.
NOTE:
•When Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable, you cannot select Ad-hoc.
6Select the encryption type from No Security, Mixed mode PSK, WPA2-PSK-AES,
or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
aTap until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.
bTap OK.
If you use Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES encryption:
aTap until Mixed mode PSK or WPA2-PSK-AES appears, and then tap the
desired encryption type.
bTap the Passphrase text box, and then enter the passphrase.
cTap OK.
If you use WEP encryption:
aTap until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.
bTap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
cTap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from Auto or WEP
Key 1 to WEP Key 4.
dTap OK.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
49
Proceed to step 8.
NOTE:
•A passphrase is an encryption key and may be described on access points or routers. For
details, refer to the manual supplied with the access point or router.
7Select the encryption type from No Security or WEP.
If you do not set security for your wireless network:
aTap until No Security appears, and then tap No Security.
bTap OK.
To use WEP encryption:
aTap until WEP appears, and then tap WEP.
bTap the WEP Key text box, and then enter the WEP key.
cTap Transmit Key, and then select the desired transmit key from WEP Key 1 to
WEP Key 4.
dTap OK.
8Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Wireless LAN connection setting is complete.
After the setting is complete, install the software. See "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers."
Changing the Wireless Settings
To change the wireless settings of the printer from your computer, start the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
You can also set the same settings using the Software and Documentation disc.
Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network
Connecting the Ethernet Cable
To connect the printer to an Ethernet network, connect an Ethernet cable into the
Ethernet port on the rear of the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable into
an Ethernet outlet or a hub.
50
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
NOTE:
•To connect to a wireless network, make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable. The printer will be
connected to the same wireless network that the computer used is currently connected.
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only)
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
•Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer using an Ethernet cable.
2On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
3Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find your printer.
4After the printer is found, select the printer, and then click Finish to complete the
setup.
Configuring With Other Methods
For details, see "Installing the Software for Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers."
Ethernet outlet/hub
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
51
Connecting to a Computer With USB
Connecting the USB Cable
To connect the printer directly to the computer, connect the smaller USB connector
into the USB port on the rear of the printer, and then connect the other end of the cable
into a USB port of the computer.
CAUTION:
• Do not connect the printer to a USB hub.
NOTE:
•Make sure to match the USB symbol on the cable plug with the USB symbol on the printer.
Connecting With Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only)
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc in your computer.
Alternatively, go to www.dell.com/support, enter the Service Tag of your printer,
download the latest software and driver, and then open the file that you
downloaded.
NOTE:
•Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer using a USB cable.
2On the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Next. Dell Printer Easy Install begins to
search for your printer.
52
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
3Wait for Dell Printer Easy Install wizard to find and install your printer.
Configuring With Other Methods
For details, see "Installing the Software for Windows
®
Computers" or "Installing the
Software for Macintosh Computers."
Installing the Software for Windows
®
Computers
Installing the Software and Print Drivers with Dell Printer Easy
Install
Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
If the Software and Documentation disc does not start, perform the following.
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10 as an example.
1Click Start All Programs Accessories Run.
For Windows
®
10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Run.
2Enter D:\setup_assist.exe (D is the drive letter of the optical drive), and then
click OK.
3In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Setup.
4Select a connection method to the printer.
5Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
6Click Finish.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the Software and Print Drivers When the Printer is
Connected to the Network or Computer
If the printer connection via USB/Ethernet/Wireless is already configured, perform the
following to install the print driver and software. You can install the driver for a printer
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
53
with USB connection or network connection.
NOTE:
•To install the print driver with network connection, you need the IP address that is assigned to the
printer. To check the IP address of the printer, perform one of the procedures in "Verifying the IP
Settings."
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL), PostScript (PS), and Fax
Driver with USB Cable Connection
NOTE:
•If you are connecting the printer to a network, see "Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL),
PostScript (PS), and Fax Driver with Network Connection."
1In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Connect.
2Select USB Cable Connection, and then click Next.
3Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
4Click Finish.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver with USB Cable
Connection
NOTE:
•XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver is supported on Windows Vista
®
or later.
•If you are using Windows Vista
®
or Windows Server
®
2008, you need to install Service Pack 2 or
later, and then the Windows
®
Platform Update (KB971644). The update (KB971644) is available for
download from Windows
®
Update.
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7 and Windows
®
10 as examples.
For Windows
®
7:
1Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D
is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2Click Start Devices and Printers Add a printer.
54
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Yes.
NOTE:
•If you are logged on as an administrator on the computer, click Yes; otherwise, contact your
administrator to continue the desired action.
3Click Add a local printer.
4Select the port connected to this product, and then click Next.
5Click Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
6Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7Click OK.
8Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9Select either Do not share this printer or Share this printer so that others on your
network can find and use it, and then click Next.
10 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box, and then click Next.
11 Click Finish.
For Windows
®
10:
1Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D is the
drive letter of the optical drive)
2Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.
3Click Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer.
4Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
5Click Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings Next Next
Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
6Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7Click OK.
8Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
10 Click Finish.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
55
Installing the Printer Control Language (PCL), PostScript (PS), and Fax
Driver with Network Connection
NOTE:
•To use the printer in a Linux environment, you need to install a Linux driver. See "Installing Print
Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)."
1In the Dell Printer Easy Install window, click Connect.
2Select Wireless or Ethernet Connection, and then click Next.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3Follow the on-screen instructions until the Ready to Print! screen appears.
4Click Finish to exit the wizard.
If necessary, click Print Test Page to verify installation.
Installing the XML Paper Specification (XPS) Print Driver with Network
Connection
For Windows
®
7:
1Extract the following zip file to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_7Vista\XPS-V3_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D
is the drive letter of the optical drive)
2Click Start Devices and Printers Add a printer.
3Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
4Select a printer, and then click Next.
Or
Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
If you select the printer, proceed to step 7.
If you click The printer that I want isn't listed, proceed to step 5.
5Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or host name, and then click Next.
56
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
6Select TCP/IP Device from Device type, enter the IP address for Hostname or IP
address, and then click Next.
NOTE:
•If the User Account Control dialog box appears and if you are the administrator of the
computer, click Yes. Otherwise, contact your administrator to continue the desired action.
7Click Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
8Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
9Click OK.
10 Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
11 Select either Do not share this printer or Share this printer so that others on your
network can find and use it, and then click Next.
12 When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box, and then click Next.
13 Click Finish.
For Windows
®
10:
1Extract the zip file you downloaded to your desired location.
D:\Drivers\XPS\Win_8\XPS-V4_H625cdw_H825cdw_S2825cdn.zip (D is the
drive letter of the optical drive)
2Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.
3Click Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer.
4Click The printer that I want isn’t listed.
5Click Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings Next Next
Have Disk.
The Install From Disk dialog box is displayed.
6Click Browse, and then select the inf file in the folder extracted in step 1.
7Click OK.
8Select the printer name, and then click Next.
If you want to change the printer name, enter the printer name in the Printer name
box, and then click Next.
9When the driver installation is completed, click Print a test page to verify installation.
If you want to use this printer as the default printer, select the Set as the default
printer check box.
10 Click Finish.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
57
Setting Up for Web Services on Devices (WSD)
Adding Roles of Printer Services (Windows Server
®
Operating Systems
Only)
When you use Windows Server
®
operating system, you need to add the roles of print
services to the operating system.
For Windows Server
®
2008 R2:
1Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager.
2Select Add Roles from the Action menu.
3Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in
the Add Roles Wizard, and then click Next Next.
4Select the Print Server check box, and then click Next Install.
Installing a Print Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10 as an example.
1Click Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows
®
10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers Add a printer.
For Windows
®
10: Proceed to step 3.
2Select Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3In the list of available printers, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.
NOTE:
•In the list of available printers, the Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the
form of http://IP address/ws/.
•If no Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer is displayed in the list, enter the printer's IP
address to create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer. To enter the printer's IP address,
perform the following procedure.
For Windows Server
®
2008 R2, to create a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer, you must
be a member of Administrators group.
1Click The printer that I want isn't listed.
2Select Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname, and then click Next.
3Select Web Services Device from Device type.
4Enter the printer's IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box, and then click Next.
•Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server
®
2008 R2 or
Windows
®
7, perform one of the following:
- Establish the Internet connection so that Windows
®
Update can scan your computer.
- Add the print driver to your computer.
4If prompted, install the print driver on your computer. If you are prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, enter the password or provide
confirmation.
5Complete the additional steps in the wizard, and then click Finish.
6Print a test page to verify print installation.
58
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
aClick Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows
®
10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers.
bRight-click the icon for the printer you just created, and then click Printer
properties.
cOn the General tab, click Print Test Page.
When a test page is printed successfully, installation is complete.
Installing the Software for Macintosh Computers
Installing the Software and Print Drivers
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc on the Macintosh computer, and then
click the CD icon.
2Double-click your printer icon, and then click Continue.
3When the popup dialog box prompts you to confirm the program included in the
installation package, click Continue.
4Click Continue on the Important Information screen.
5Select a language for the Software License Agreement screen.
6After reading Software License Agreement, click Continue.
7If you agree to the terms of Software License Agreement, click Agree to continue
the installation process.
8Specify the installation location, and then click Continue.
9Click Install.
If you want to select a custom installation, click Customize and select items that you
want to install.
10 Enter the administrator's name and password, and then click Install Software
Continue Installation.
11 Click Log Out or Close.
Adding a Printer Using USB Connection
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Turn on the printer.
2Connect the USB cable to the printer and the Macintosh computer.
Adding a Printer Using IP Printing
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Turn on the printer.
2Make sure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
Connecting Your Printer to a Computer |
59
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet
cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured
properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
4Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner, and then click IP.
5Select Line Printer Daemon - LPD for Protocol.
6Enter the IP address for the printer in the Address area.
7Select Dell Color MFP H625cdw, Dell Color MFP H825cdw, or Dell Color MFP
S2825cdn for Use.
NOTE:
•When printing is set up using IP printing feature, the queue name is displayed as blank. You do
not need to specify it.
8Click Add.
9Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
10 Make sure that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
Adding a Printer Using Bonjour
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Turn on the printer.
2Make sure that Macintosh computer and the printer are connected.
If you use wired connection, connect the printer to the network via an Ethernet
cable.
If you use wireless connection, make sure that the wireless connection is configured
properly on your Macintosh computer and the printer.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
3Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
4Click the Plus (+) sign, select Add Printer or Scanner, and then click Default.
5Select the printer connected via Bonjour from the Printer Name list.
6Name and Use are automatically entered.
NOTE:
•If AirPrint Printer is selected for Print Using (or Use), select Dell Color MFP H625cdw, Dell
Color MFP H825cdw, or Dell Color MFP S2825cdn manually.
7Click Add.
8Specify the options that have been installed on the printer, and then click Continue.
9Make sure that the printer is displayed in the Printers & Scanners dialog box.
60
| Connecting Your Printer to a Computer
Configuring With Optional Accessories
On the driver, specify the optional accessories that have been installed on the printer to
enable features associated with those accessories.
1Open the System Preferences, and then click Printers & Scanners.
2Select the printer in the Printers list, and then click Options & Supplies.
3Select Options, and select the options that have been installed on the printer, and
then click OK.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
61
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
You can connect the printer directly to your mobile devices, such as computers, smart
phones, and tablets, and then you can print or scan documents, photos, web pages, or
e-mail quickly and easily.
Overview
The following shows the compatibility between the mobile printing services and
operating systems.
( : compatible, Blank: not compatible)
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows your mobile devices to connect to the printer directly via a Wi-Fi
network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can print documents, photos, or e-mail on your mobile
devices directly without an access point or a wireless router.
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
•You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
•Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via
Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode may not work properly.
•The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols; LPD, Port9100, WSD
*
,
Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
* WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct
To use Wi-Fi Direct, you need to first set up the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the operator
panel of the printer. To connect the mobile device to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct, select
the SSID of the printer from the list of wireless networks on the mobile device and enter
the passphrase necessary for connection.
Setting Up the Printer
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
Windows
®
Macintosh iOS Android™
Wi-Fi Direct
®
Dell Document Hub
Tap to Print/Scan
AirPrint™
Google Cloud Print™
Mopria™ Print
62
| Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
2Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3In the Wi-Fi Direct menu, tap Wi-Fi Direct Enable OK.
If a popup message about the mobile devices is displayed, tap Close.
4Tap Group Role Group Owner OK Paired Device.
5Make sure that no device is connected with the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
NOTE:
•When other mobile device is connected, the device name and Connected are displayed on
Paired Device, and you cannot use the Wi-Fi Direct connection. Disconnect the other
mobile device from the Wi-Fi Direct network. See "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network."
6Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
7Repeat steps 1 and 2 after the printer is restarted, and then tap Group Owner.
8Tap SSID and Passphrase to check what the SSID and passphrase are.
NOTE:
•To check the printer's SSID and passphrase, you can also print the list by tapping Print
Passphrase under the Passphrase menu.
Connecting the Mobile Device
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7, Windows
®
10, OS X 10.10, iOS, and Android
as examples.
Connect the mobile device to the Wi-Fi Direct network.
For Windows
®
7:
1Click the network icon on the taskbar.
2Click the printer's SSID Connect.
3Enter the passphrase, and then click OK.
4Click Cancel, and then exit the Set Network Location window.
For Windows
®
10:
1Click the Start button, and then click Settings.
2Click the Wi-Fi icon.
3Click the printer's SSID Connect.
4Enter the passphrase, and then click Next.
For OS X 10.10:
1Click the network icon on the Menu Bar.
2Click the printer's SSID.
3Enter the passphrase, and then click Join.
For iOS:
1Tap Settings Wi-Fi.
2Tap the printer's SSID.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
63
3Enter the passphrase, and then tap Join.
For Android:
The procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to the
manual supplied with your mobile device.
Printing via Wi-Fi Direct
Installing the Print Driver
Before printing, you are required to install the print driver accordingly.
For Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device. See "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers."
For OS X 10.10:
You need to install the print driver on the mobile device. See "Installing the Software for
Macintosh Computers."
For iOS:
You need to install the printing program from App Store, and then the printer is ready for
use. For details, see "Dell Document Hub."
For Android:
You need to install the printing program from Google Play™, and then the printer is
ready for use. For details, see "Dell Document Hub."
The printing procedure varies depending on your mobile device you are using. Refer to
the manual supplied with your mobile device to print as you normally do from the
mobile device.
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct Network
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
2Tap Wi-Fi Direct Paired Device.
NOTE:
•The Paired Device menu is displayed only when the printer is connected via Wi-Fi Direct.
3Tap the mobile device name to disconnect, or select Disconnect All.
4Tap Disconnect now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase Yes.
You can also disconnect the mobile device from the following steps:
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Wi-Fi Direct Paired
Device.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap Disconnect All.
4Tap Disconnect now or Disconnect and Reset Passphrase Yes.
64
| Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
Resetting the Passphrase
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3Tap until Passphrase appears, and then tap Passphrase.
4Tap Reset Passphrase Yes.
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the passphrase is reset.
Resetting the PIN
1Press the (Wi-Fi) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2Tap Wi-Fi Direct.
3Tap until WPS Setup appears, and then tap WPS Setup.
4Tap PIN Code Reset Code Yes.
The Wi-Fi Direct is disconnected and the PIN is reset.
Dell Document Hub
The Dell Document Hub app allows you to scan to and print from a variety of common
cloud storage services. Easy to use and navigate, this free app enables direct printing of
photos, documents, web content and more, to supported Dell printers on a Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi
Direct, or Ethernet network. You can also view the printer status and configuration of
print and scan settings. For details, click Learn more at www.dell.com/dochub.
Android
Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from Google Play.
Scan the QR Code
®
for quick access to the relevant application store.
iOS
Download the Dell Document Hub app for free from App Store.
Scan the QR Code for quick access to the relevant application store.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
65
Tap To Print/Scan
Tap To Print allows you to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a
notebook computer, simply by tapping the mobile device onto the printer. Once the
printer is added to the mobile device, you can start printing or scanning from the mobile
device.
NOTE:
•To utilize the Tap To Print feature, make sure the followings:
- The mobile device should be NFC-enabled and running the Windows
®
8.1 or Windows
®
10
operating system.
- The printer should be connected to a network. If the printer is connected with the computer
only with the USB cable, the Tap To Print feature is not available.
•The Tap To Print feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Preparations
•Make sure that the Tap To Print feature is enabled.
The Tap To Print feature is enabled as default on the printer.
To enable the Tap To Print feature from the operator panel, perform the following.
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™
Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings System Settings.
3Tap until NFC - Tap to Print appears, and then tap NFC - Tap to
Print.
4Tap Enable OK.
5Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
•Make sure that both the printer and the computer are on the same network.
•It is recommended that the computer is connected to the Internet so that the latest
driver could be installed on the computer.
Adding the Printer to the Mobile Device
While the printer is connected to the same subnet of the network with the mobile
device, you can add the printer to the mobile device by tapping the mobile device onto
the printer. The printer is added as a Web Services on Devices (WSD) printer.
The following procedure uses Windows
®
8.1/Windows
®
10 as an example.
NOTE:
•Make sure that the NFC function is activated on the mobile device.
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
66
| Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
1Locate the NFC reader of the mobile device.
2Tap the mobile device onto the (NFC) reader of the printer.
For the location of (NFC) reader, see "Operator Panel."
The printer beeps when it detects the mobile device, and the following message
appears in the top right corner of the mobile device.
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
3Tap the message window to set up the printer on the mobile device.
The printer icon appears on the mobile device.
NOTE:
•The time required until the driver is installed depending on the network traffic.
•To check the printer icon, right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers.
•If a printer icon already exists on the mobile device, the message appears in the top right
corner of the mobile device screen confirming whether to connect to the printer.
In this case, tap the message window to connect the mobile device to the printer.
Printing or Scanning
Once the printer is added and connected to the mobile device, you can start printing or
scanning. See "Sending a Job to Print" or "Scanning to a Computer With a Network
Connection."
AirPrint
AirPrint allows you to print through a network with the device running iOS or OS
X. Be sure to install the latest version of iOS for iOS device. For OS X, be sure to
update OS X and the apps you have purchased from the App Store using the
Software Update.
Setting Up AirPrint on Your Printer
1Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Add a device?
Tap to set up your Dell-H825cdw-xxxxxx.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
67
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
3Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab AirPrint.
4Select the Enable AirPrint check box.
5Click Apply New Settings Restart Printer.
Printing via AirPrint
The following procedure uses the iPhone running iOS 8.1 as an example.
1Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2Tap the action icon .
3Tap Print.
4Select the printer and set printer options.
5Tap Print.
Google Cloud Print
By registering the printer to your Google
TM
account, Google Cloud Print service allows
you to print from various devices connected to the Internet. You can print documents,
photos or e-mails using the Google Chrome
TM
browser or applications such as Google
Drive
TM
on your mobile device. For details about Google Cloud Print, visit the Google web
site.
Preparing to Use the Printer With Google Cloud Print
To use Google Cloud Print, you need to prepare the following in advance:
•Connect the printer to a network that has access to the Internet.
NOTE:
•Google Cloud Print supports only IPv4 connection.
•If the printer is connected to a network via a proxy server, you need to specify the settings in
Proxy Server from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Proxy Server."
•Acquire a Google account and a Gmail
TM
address.
•Enable Google Cloud Print on the operator panel.
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™
Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network Protocols.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap until Google Cloud Print appears, and then tap Google Cloud
Print.
4Tap Enable OK.
5Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
Selecting the Version of the Google Cloud Print Service
Select the version of the Google Cloud Print service from either version 1.1 or version
68
| Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
2.0.
Google Cloud Print version 1.1 sends the print data to the printer via Internet. For this
version, the printer needs to be connected to the Internet.
Google Cloud Print version 2.0 sends the print data to the printer either via Internet or via
local network. This version is recommended for the environment where the Internet
connection cannot be used.
NOTE:
•Available options for printing may vary according to your device or the version of the Google
Cloud Print service.
•You cannot simultaneously use both version 1.1 and version 2.0 of the Google Cloud Print service
on a printer.
Registering the Printer to Your Google Account
For Google Cloud Print Version 1.1
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab Google Cloud Print
Register This Device to Google Cloud Print.
A sheet with a URL for the Google Cloud Print printer registration web site is printed.
3From the web browser of your computer, visit the Google web site and sign in with
your Google account.
You can visit the Google Cloud Print registration web site by entering the URL on the
printout into your web browser or by scanning the QR code with your mobile
device.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
69
4On the Google Cloud Print registration web site, click Finish printer registration.
5Click Manage your printers.
The printer is listed in the Printers list and ready for use with the Google Cloud Print
service.
For Google Cloud Print Version 2.0
1Open the Google Chrome browser. When you are using the Google Chromebook,
start and log in to the Chromebook.
2Click in the top right corner, and then select Settings.
3Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.
4Click Google Cloud Print Manage.
NOTE:
•If a message is displayed under New Devices to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to
Chrome.
5Click Register for the printer you want to register.
NOTE:
•If Bonjour (mDNS) is disabled, the newly added printer is not displayed in New devices. In this
case, start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. Click Print Server Settings the Print
Server Settings tab Port Settings. Select the Bonjour (mDNS) check box.
6When the window to confirm the registration appears, click Register.
7Follow the on-screen instruction on the printer.
8When the printer name appears in the My devices list, the registration is completed.
NOTE:
•It may take about 5 minutes or more until the printer name appears in the My devices list.
Sharing the Printer With the Google Cloud Print Service
You can share the printer registered for the Google Cloud Print service with other users.
1Open the Google Chrome browser.
When you are using the Google Chromebook, start and log in to the Chromebook.
2Click in the top right corner, and then select Settings.
3Click Show advanced settings in the bottom of the page.
4Click Google Cloud Print Manage.
NOTE:
•If a message is displayed to sign in to Chrome, click sign in and sign in to Chrome.
5Click Manage for the printer you want to share.
6Click Google Cloud Print Share.
70
| Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices
7In the window to specify the printer sharing, enter the Google accounts of the users
that you want to invite to share the printer, and click Share.
NOTE:
•When the invited users log in to the Google Cloud Print web page, a message appears to
show that the printer owner made the sharing settings. Accept the sharing invitation.
Canceling the Registration to Google Cloud Print
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings Cancel Registration.
3Make sure that Register This Device to Google Cloud Print appears.
Printing via Google Cloud Print
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using.
You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service on the Google
web site.
Printing From an Application on a Mobile Device
The following procedure uses the Google Drive application on an Android mobile device
as an example.
1Install the Google Drive application on your mobile device.
NOTE:
•You can download the application from Google Play.
2Start the Google Drive application from your mobile device.
3Tap next to the file name of the file you want to print.
4Tap Print.
If Print is not displayed, tap , and then tap Print.
5Select a google cloud printer form the list.
6Specify printer options, and then tap .
Printing From Google Chrome
NOTE:
•You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.
The following procedure uses the Google Chrome browser on a Windows
®
PC as an
example.
1Open the Google Chrome browser.
2Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
3Click or (varies depending on the version of the Google Chrome browser) in
the top right corner, and then click Print.
4In the Destination area, click Change.
5In the Google Cloud Print area, select the printer.
Connecting Your Printer to Mobile Devices |
71
6Click Print.
Printing From Google Chromebook
NOTE:
•You are required to register the Google Cloud Print Version 2.0.
1Open the web page or e-mail that you want to print.
2Click in the top right corner and then click Print.
3Confirm that your printer is specified in the Destination area. If not, click Change
and select your printer.
4Click Print.
Mopria Print Service
Mopria-certified mobile devices can connect and print to certify printer. Either connect
your mobile devices to the same network as the printer or make a direct connection with
Wi-Fi Direct.
Works with Mopria-certified smartphones and tablets or Android 4.4 devices with the
Mopria Print Service download from Google Play.
https://play.google.com/store/apps/
http://www.mopria.org/
NOTE:
•Your mobile device and printer need to be connected to the same network.
•Mopria Print Service may be preloaded into your smartphone or tablet. If your mobile device does
not have the Mopria Print Service, you can easily download it free of charge from Google Play.
•Make sure that Mopria is set to Enable in advance using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Mopria."
Setting Up Mopria Print Service on Your Printer
1Make sure that the printer is connected to the network.
2Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
3Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab Mopria.
4Click Enable.
The printer is ready for Mopria Print Service.
Printing via Mopria Print Service
1Open your e-mail, photo, web page, or document that you want to print.
2Tap the menu, and then select Print.
3Tap All printers in the menu.
4Select the printer, and then set printer options.
5Tap Print.
72
| Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers
Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
This section provides information for installing or setting up the print driver with CUPS
on Red Hat
®
Enterprise Linux
®
6 Desktop, SUSE
®
Linux Enterprise Desktop 11, or Ubuntu
12.04 LTS.
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
Operation on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
Setup Overview
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop:
1Install the print driver.
2Set up the print queue.
3Set up the default queue.
4Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1Select Applications System Tools Terminal.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window.
Setting Up the Print Queue
To perform printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2Click Administration Add Printer.
3Enter root as the user name, enter the administrator password, and then click OK.
For network connections:
aSelect LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
bEnter the IP address of the printer in Connection, and then click Continue.
Format: lpd:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections:
aSelect Dell Color MFP H825cdw from the Local Printers menu, and then click
Continue.
su
[administrator password]
rpm -ivh [file path]
/Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw-x.x-x.rpm
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) |
73
4Enter the name of the printer in the Name box in the Add Printer window, and then
click Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further
information.
5Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw vxxxx.PS (en) from the Model menu, and then click
Add Printer.
Printing From the Program
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print from the programs. To print
from the program, specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, on programs such as Mozilla, it may only be possible to print from the default
queue.
In these cases, set the queue that you want to print to as the default queue before you
start printing. See "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
1Select Applications System Tools Terminal.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2Click Administration Manage Printers.
3Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
4Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
5Click the desired setting item to specify the required settings, and then click Set
Default Options.
su
[administrator password]
lpadmin -d [queue name]
74
| Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1Select Applications System Tools Terminal.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
3Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
4Enter the following command in the terminal window.
Operation on SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
Setup Overview
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
1Install the print driver.
2Set up the print queue.
3Set up the default queue.
4Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1Select Computer More Applications..., and then select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window.
su
[administrator password]
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x [queue name]
su
[administrator password]
rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
su
[administrator password]
rpm -ivh [file path] /
Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw-x.x-x.rpm
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) |
75
Setting Up the Print Queue
To perform printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1Select Computer More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application
Browser.
2Enter the administrator password, and then click Continue.
3Select Hardware Printer.
For network connections:
aClick Add.
bClick Connection Wizard.
cSelect Line Printer Daemon (LPD) Protocol from Access Network Printer or
Printserver Box via.
dEnter the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name:.
eSelect Dell in the Select the printer manufacturer: drop-down list box.
fClick OK.
gSelect your printer from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE:
•You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
hCheck the settings, and then click OK.
For USB connections:
aClick Add.
bSelect your printer from the Assign Driver list.
NOTE:
•You can specify the printer name in Set Name:.
cCheck the settings, and then click OK.
Printing From the Program
When you have finished setting up the queue, you can print from the programs. To print
from the program, specify the queue in the print dialog box.
However, sometimes you can print only from the default queue depending on the
program such as Mozilla. In these cases, before you start printing, set queue you want to
print to as the default queue. See "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
You can set the default queue when you add the printer.
1Select Computer More Applications..., and then select YaST on the Application
Browser.
2Enter the administrator password, and then click Continue.
3Select Hardware Printer.
4Click Edit.
5Check that the printer you want to set is selected in the Connection list.
6Select the Default Printer check box.
76
| Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
7Check the settings, and then click OK.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as color mode.
1Open a web browser.
2Enter http://localhost:631/admin in Location, and then press <Enter> on the
keyboard.
3Click Manage Printers.
4Click Set Printer Options of the printer for which you want to specify the printing
options.
5Specify the required settings, and then click Set Printer Options.
6Enter root as the user name, enter the administrator password, and then click OK.
NOTE:
•Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue. If
you have not set it, proceed to "Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer
Administrator."
7Execute printing from the program.
Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator
You must set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as
the printer administrator.
1Select Computer More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window.
3Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator.
4Re-enter the password.
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1Select Computer More Applications... and select GNOME Terminal on the
Application Browser.
2Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
su
[administrator password]
lppasswd -g sys -a root
su
[administrator password]
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x [queue name]
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) |
77
3Repeat the command above for all queues for the printer.
4Enter the following command in the terminal window.
Operation on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
Setup Overview
1Install the print driver.
2Set up the print queue.
3Set up the default queue.
4Specify the printing options.
Installing the Print Driver
1Click Dash Home, and then enter the terminal in the Search text box.
2Click Applications Terminal.
3Enter the following command in the terminal window.
For the 32-bit architecture:
For the 64-bit architecture:
Setting Up the Print Queue
To execute printing, you must set up the print queue on your workstation.
1Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2Click Administration Add Printer.
3Enter the user name and the administrator password, and then click OK.
4Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection.
For network connections:
su
[administrator password]
rpm -e Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
sudo lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
sudo dpkg –i (Type the file path)/
dell-color-mfp-s2825cdn-h825cdw-*.*-*_amd6
4.deb
(Type the administrator password)
78
| Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
aSelect LPD/LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu, and
then click Continue.
bEnter the IP address of the printer in Connection, and then click Continue.
Format: lpd://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (the IP address of the printer)
For USB connections:
aSelect Dell Color MFP H825cdw from the Local Printers menu, and then click
Continue.
5Select the Add Printer window, and then enter the name of the printer in the Name
box.
6Click Continue.
You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer for further
information.
If you want to share the printer, select the Share This Printer check box.
7Select Dell from the Make menu, and then click Continue.
8Select Dell Color MFP H825cdw vxxxx.PS from the Model menu, and then click Add
Printer.
Printing From Applications
When you have finished setting up the print queue, you can print jobs from the
applications.
Start the print job from the application, and then specify the queue in the print dialog
box.
However, on programs such as Mozilla, it may only be possible to print from the default
queue.
In these cases, set the queue that you want to print to as the default queue before you
start printing.
For information on specifying the default queue, see "Setting Up the Default Queue."
Setting Up the Default Queue
1Click Dash Home, and then enter terminal in the Search text box.
2Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3Enter the following command in the terminal window.
Specifying the Printing Options
You can specify the printing options such as 2-sided printing.
1Open the URL http://localhost:631 using a web browser.
2Click Administration Manage Printers.
3Click the queue name for which you want to specify the printing options.
sudo lpadmin -d (Enter the queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
Installing Print Drivers on Linux Computers Using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) |
79
4Select Set Default Options from the Administration menu.
5Click the desired setting item, and then specify the required settings.
6Click Set Default Options.
Uninstalling the Print Driver
1Click Dash Home, and then enter terminal in the Search text box.
2Click Terminal in the Applications category of the search results.
3Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue.
4Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model.
5Enter the following command in the terminal window.
sudo /usr/sbin/lpadmin -x (Type the print queue name)
(Type the administrator password)
sudo dpkg –r Dell-Color-MFP-S2825cdn-H825cdw
(Type the administrator password)
80
| Setting the IP Address
Setting the IP Address
Assigning an IP Address
You can select the IP mode from Dual Stack, IPv4, and IPv6. If your network supports
both IPv4 and IPv6, select Dual Stack.
Select the IP mode of your environment, and then set IP address, subnet mask (for IPv4
only), and gateway address.
NOTE:
•Assigning an IP address that is already in use can cause network performance issues.
•IP addresses should be assigned by advanced users or system administrators.
•When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode, use the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web
Tool. To display the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, use the link-local address. To check the
link-local address, print a system settings report and check the Link-Local Address under Network
(Wired) or Network (Wireless).
See "Report / List."
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
When Using the Dell Printer Easy Install (Windows
®
Only)
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
2Click Main Menu.
3Click Change.
Setting the IP Address |
81
4Click Configure the IP address settings Next.
5Follow the on-screen instructions until the Configure Printer screen appears.
6Click Advanced.
7Specify the IP address settings according to your network environment.
8Click Next, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
When Using the Operator Panel
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Network.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Perform either of the following:
If the printer is connected to a network with the Ethernet cable:
Tap Ethernet.
For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw:
If the printer is connected to a wireless network:
Tap Wi-Fi.
4Tap IP Mode IPv4 Mode OK.
5Tap until TCP / IP appears, and then tap TCP / IP Get IP Address.
6Select how the IP address is assigned.
•To set the IP address automatically, select AutoIP, DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or
Panel, and then proceed to step 7.
•To set the IP address manually, select Panel, and then perform the following:
aTap IP Address.
The cursor is located at the first octet of the IP address.
bUse the number pad to enter the first octet of the IP address, and then tap .
The cursor moves to the next octet.
NOTE:
•You can only enter one octet at a time and must tap after entering each octet.
cEnter the rest of the octets, and then tap OK.
dTap Subnet Mask.
eUse the number pad to enter the subnet mask, and then tap OK.
fTap Gateway Address.
gUse the number pad to enter the gateway address, and then tap OK.
7Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again.
Verifying the IP Settings
You can check the settings by using the operator panel, or printing the system settings
report.
82
| Setting the IP Address
Verifying the Settings Using Operator Panel
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap About This MFP the Network tab.
3Verify the IP address displayed in IP(v4) Address.
Verifying the Settings Using System Settings Report
1Print the system settings report.
See "Report / List."
2Verify that the correct IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address are listed in the
system settings report under Network (Wired) or Network (Wireless).
If the IP address shows 0.0.0.0, an IP address has not been assigned. See
"Assigning an IP Address."
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
|
83
3
Using Your Printer
Using the Operator Panel 84
Understanding the System Menus 90
Understanding the Job Menus 125
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool 139
Print Media Guidelines 187
Loading Print Media 193
Loading Documents 204
84
| Using the Operator Panel
Using the Operator Panel
The operator panel consists of a touch panel, a Ready/Error LED, control buttons, a
(Power) button, and a number pad. Use the touch panel and number pad to browse the
operator panel menus and enter texts and numbers.
For details about names of parts, see "Operator Panel."
NOTE:
•The screenshots used in this section are those of the Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw unless
otherwise mentioned.
About the Home Screen
This section describes the fields and buttons on the Home screen which is displayed by
pressing the (Home) button while the user is logged in to the printer.
NOTE:
•To display the Home screen, register at the portal screen beforehand and log in to the printer, or log
in as a Guest without registration. See "User Authentication."
•Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw only.
•Wi-Fi Direct Connection Status Icon and Wireless LAN Connection Status Icon are displayed on
Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw only.
1 Dock Menu (Recent) Button
Displays the tiles of the functions you recently used. Up to 8 tiles can
be stored.
(Copy) Button
Displays the tiles of the copy functions.
(Print )Button
Displays the tiles of the print functions.
(Scan) Button
Displays the tiles of the scan functions.
(Fax) Button
Displays the tile of the fax function.
(Tools) Button
Displays the Information screen.
Home Guest
213546
7
8
Home Guest
23
7
8
16
Dell H625cdw/Dell H825cdw Dell S2825cdn
Using the Operator Panel |
85
Basic Operations on the Touch Panel
You can operate the touch panel as with a smartphone or a tablet.
Selecting the Item on the Screen
Tap the item.
Scrolling the Screen or the Listed Items
Swipe the screen by dragging your finger on the screen.
2 Notification Bar Displays the status of the printer when (Handle) is dragged
down. To close the screen, drag (Handle) up.
You can adjust the screen brightness, check the toner information,
monitor the jobs currently in progress, or check warnings in this area.
•To adjust the screen brightness, drag the slider in Screen
Brightness.
•To see the Toner Information, tap Supplies. The information
of the toner is displayed with one toner at a time. To see the
information of other toners, swipe the screen.
3 Lock Icon Displays when some functions are limited to access by the
Functions Control settings. While the Lock icon is displayed on the
upper-right of the tile, you are required to enter the password to
enable the function. After the function is enabled, the Lock icon is
displayed on the left to the account name, and you can access the
password-locked functions without re-entering the password.
For details about Functions Control, see "Functions Control"
4Wi-Fi Direct Connection
Status Icon
Displays the Wi-Fi Direct connection status. This icon is displayed
only when Wi-Fi Direct is enabled.
5 Wireless LAN Connection
Status Icon
Displays the intensity of wireless signal when the printer is
connected to a wireless network.
6 Time/Network Information Displays the current time or the network information such as IPv4
address or host name.
7 Account Name Displays the name of the user currently logged in to the printer.
8 Tiles Displays the tiles of the functions you can select from.
When the tile color is pale and disabled, you cannot select the
function.
Guest
86
| Using the Operator Panel
To scroll faster, flick the screen.
NOTE:
•If you cannot swipe or flick on some screens, operate by tapping the tiles or buttons.
Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles
NOTE:
•This is available when you select the local authentication. See "User Authentication."
To Move the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to move, and then drag it to the desired place.
The short orange bar appears between the tiles to show the nearest drop point when
you are dragging the tile.
You can move the tile between pages as well.
NOTE:
•You cannot move the tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock menu.
To Add the Tiles
Swipe the screen to display the last page of the Home screen or group screen, and then
Home Guest
Home Guest
Home Guest Home Guest
Using the Operator Panel |
87
tap Add App.
When the Apps List screen appears, tap the tile you want to add to the Home screen.
To Delete the Tiles
Tap and hold the tile you want to delete.
When appears, drag the tile to .
Tap OK to delete the tile.
NOTE:
•To delete all tiles in the Recent group screen of the Dock Menu, tap in the Recent group
screen, and then tap OK.
Using the Keyboard Displayed on the Touch Panel
During operations, a keyboard for entering text sometimes appears. The following
describes how to enter text.
You can enter the following characters:
To Change the Keyboard Layout
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Language Settings Keyboard Layout.
3Tap the desired keyboard layout, and then tap OK.
Item Description
Entering alphabets To enter uppercase letters, tap . To return to the lowercase letters,
tap again. To lock to the uppercase letters, double-tap .
Entering numbers and symbols Tap .
Entering a space Tap .
Deleting characters Tap to delete one character at a time.
Home Guest
Back
QWERTY AZERTY QWERTZ
Done Back Done Back Done
88
| Using the Operator Panel
Changing the Language
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Language Settings Panel Language.
3Tap until the desired language appears, and then tap the desired language.
4Tap OK.
Panel Lock
The Panel Lock feature allows some system settings to be kept in a locked state with the
password so that unauthorized personnel cannot access to the menu to change the
settings.
NOTE:
•Disabling the operator panel menus does not prevent access to the Stored Print and Tray
Settings menus.
Enabling the Panel Lock
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings.
3Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
4Tap Panel Lock Panel Lock Control Enable OK.
5Enter the new password, and then tap OK.
6Re-enter the password, and then tap OK.
CAUTION:
• Make sure not to forget the password. If you forget the password, the following procedure
allows you to reset the password. However, the settings for the Address Book and Phone
Book will be reset as well.
1Turn off the printer.
2While holding the (Information) button, turn on the printer.
Changing the Panel Lock Password
NOTE:
•You can change the password only when Panel Lock is set to Enable.
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings.
3Enter the password.
4Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
5Tap Panel Lock Change Password.
6Enter the current password, and then tap OK.
7Enter the new password, and then tap OK.
8Re-enter the password, and then tap OK.
Using the Operator Panel |
89
Disabling the Panel Lock
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings.
3Enter the password.
4Tap until Secure Settings appears, and then tap Secure Settings.
5Tap Panel Lock Panel Lock Control Disable OK.
6Enter the current password, and then tap OK.
Setting the Power Saver Timer
The printer enters the power saver mode when the printer is not used for a certain
period of time. You can set the Power Saver Timer for the printer on the operator
panel.
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings System Settings General
Power Saver Timer.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap Sleep or Deep Sleep.
4Tap – or +, or use the number pad to enter the desired value.
You can specify from 1 to 50 minutes for Sleep or 1 to 10 minutes for Deep Sleep.
5Tap OK.
About the Concurrent Jobs Feature
This feature enables you to start a concurrent job while a fax job is running. This is done
by temporarily displaying the Home screen and switching to a different function that can
be run concurrently such as copy or scan.
1While the printer is sending or receiving a fax, press the (Home) button.
2Tap Copy.
Or
Tap Scan.
3Change the copy or scan settings.
For details about the settings, see "Copying" or "Scanning."
4Tap OK.
90
| Understanding the System Menus
Understanding the System Menus
The system menus are configured by Information, Supplies, and Tools tabs,
accessible by pressing the (Information) button on the operator panel.
You can limit the access to the some menus by setting the password.
This prevents other users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the
settings. See "Panel Lock."
Report / List
Use the Report / List menu to print various types of reports and lists.
To display the Report / List menu, press the (Information) button, and then tap
the Information tab.
❚
Report / List >
System Settings
Prints a list of the current user default values, the installed options, the amount of
installed print memory, and the status of printer supplies.
❚
Report / List >
Panel Settings
Prints a detailed list of all the settings of the printer menus.
❚
Report / List >
PCL Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available Printer Control Language (PCL) fonts.
❚
Report / List >
PCL Macros List
Prints the information on the downloaded PCL macro.
❚
Report / List >
PS Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available PostScript (PS) fonts.
❚
Report / List >
PDF Fonts List
Prints a sample of the available PDF fonts.
❚
Report / List >
Job History
Prints a detailed list of the print, copy, fax, or scan jobs that have been processed. This list
contains the last 20 jobs.
Understanding the System Menus |
91
❚
Report / List >
Error History
Prints a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors.
❚
Report / List >
Print Meter
Prints the reports for the total number of pages printed.
❚
Report / List >
Color Test Page
Prints a page for testing colors.
❚
Report / List >
Protocol Monitor
Prints a detailed list of monitored protocols.
❚
Report / List >
Speed Dial
Prints the list of all members stored as speed dial numbers.
❚
Report / List >
Address Book
Prints the list of all addresses stored as address book information.
❚
Report / List >
Server Address
Prints the list of all members stored as server address information.
❚
Report / List >
Fax Activity
Prints the report of faxes you recently received or sent.
❚
Report / List >
Fax Pending
Prints the list of status of pending faxes.
❚
Report / List >
Stored Documents
Prints a list of all files stored for Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail Box Print,
and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
NOTE:
•Stored Documents feature is available only when RAM Disk in General under System Settings
is enabled.
92
| Understanding the System Menus
Printing a Report / List
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap Report / List.
3Tap until the desired report or list appears, and then select that report or list.
4Tap Print.
Wi-Fi | WPS
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Use the Wi-Fi | WPS menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings or
connections.
To display the Wi-Fi | WPS menu, press the (Information) button, and then tap
the Information tab.
❚
Wi-Fi | WPS >
Wi-Fi
Use the Wi-Fi menu to confirm or specify wireless network settings. For details, see
"Wi-Fi.”
❚
Wi-Fi | WPS >
Wi-Fi Direct
Use the Wi-Fi Direct menu to confirm or specify Wi-Fi Direct network settings. For
details, see "Wi-Fi Direct.”
❚
Wi-Fi | WPS >
WPS (Connect via PBC)
Use WPS (Connect via PBC) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network
with WPS-PBC. For details, see "WPS Setup.”
❚
Wi-Fi | WPS >
WPS (Connect via PIN)
Use WPS (Connect via PIN) menu to start configurations of the Wi-Fi Direct network
with WPS-PIN. For details, see "WPS Setup.”
Paired Device
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Use the Paired Device menu to confirm the device name in the Paired Device list,
if there is any device connected to the printer via Wi-Fi Direct.
You can disconnect the paired device. For details, see "Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct
Network.”
Admin Settings
Each feature of the printer is set to the factory default settings.
Understanding the System Menus |
93
Use the Admin Settings menu to customize the settings in accordance with the
setting environment, or your preferences.
To display the Admin Settings menu, press the (Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚
Admin Settings >
Phone Book
Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Phone Book >
Individuals
Stores up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations.
❚
Admin Settings > Phone Book >
Groups
Creates a group of fax destinations and register it under a two-digit dial code. Up to six
group dial codes can be registered.
❚
Admin Settings >
PCL
Use the PCL menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the Printer
Control Language (PCL) emulation printer language.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Paper Tray
Specifies the default paper tray.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Paper Size
Specifies the default paper size.
NOTE:
•Selecting a custom size for the paper size prompts you to enter a custom length and width.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Orientation
Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
Portrait Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper.
Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper.
94
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Font
Specifies the default font from the fonts registered in the printer.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Symbol Set
Specifies a symbol set for a specified font.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Font Size
Specifies the font size for scalable typographic fonts. Font size refers to the height of the
characters in the font. One point equals approximately 1/72 of an inch (approximately
0.35 mm).
NOTE:
•The Font Size menu is only displayed for typographic fonts.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Font Pitch
Specifies the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts. Font pitch refers to the number
of fixed-space characters in a horizontal inch of type. For non-scalable mono spaced
fonts, the pitch is displayed, but cannot be changed.
NOTE:
•The Font Pitch menu is only displayed for fixed or mono spaced fonts.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Form Line
Sets the number of lines in a page. The printer sets the amount of space between two
vertical lines based on the Form Line and Orientation menu items. You can select
the correct Form Line and Orientation before changing Form Line.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Quantity
Sets the default print quantity. Set the number of copies required for a specific job from
the print driver. Values selected from the print driver always override values selected
from the operator panel.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Image Enhance
Specifies whether to enable the Image Enhance feature, which makes the boundary line
between black and white smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual
appearance.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Hex Dump
Specifies whether to enable the Hex Dump feature, which helps to isolate the source of a
print job problem. With Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not executed.
Understanding the System Menus |
95
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Draft Mode
Specifies whether to enable the Draft Mode feature, which saves toner by printing in the
draft mode. The print quality is reduced when printing in the draft mode.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Line Termination
Adds the line termination commands.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Default Color
Specifies the color mode. This setting is used for a print job that does not specify a print
mode.
❚
Admin Settings > PCL >
Ignore Form Feed
Specifies whether to enable the Ignore Form Feed feature, which ignores blank pages
that only contain Form Feed control codes.
❚
Admin Settings >
PS
Use the PS (PostScript) menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the
PostScript Level3 Compatible emulation printer language.
❚
Admin Settings > PS >
PS Error Report
Specifies whether to enable the PS Error Report feature, which specifies the contents of
the errors concerning PostScript Level3 Compatible page description language are
printed.
The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
NOTE:
•Instructions from the PS driver override the settings specified on the operator panel.
❚
Admin Settings > PS >
PS Job Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the PS feature, which specifies the execution time for one
PostScript Level3 Compatible job. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
Off The line termination command is not added.
CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-LF The LF command is added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=LF, FF=FF
Add-CR The CR command is added.
CR=CR, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
CR-XX The CR and LF commands are added.
CR=CR-LF, LF=CR-LF, FF=CR-FF
96
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > PS >
Paper Select Mode
Specifies the way to select the tray for PostScript Level3 Compatible mode. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
❚
Admin Settings > PS >
Default Color
Specifies the color mode to Color or Black. This setting is used for a print job which
does not specify a print mode.
❚
Admin Settings >
PDF
Use the PDF menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies to print.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Print Mode
Specifies the print mode.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
PDF Password
Specifies the password to print a PDF file secured with a password to open the PDF file.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the PDF job.
Auto The tray is selected as the same setting as in the PCL mode.
Select From Tray The tray is selected in a method compatible with regular PostScript
Level3 Compatible printers.
Normal For documents with normal sized characters.
High Quality For documents with small characters or thin lines, or documents
printed using a dot-matrix printer.
High Speed Prints with the higher speed than the Normal mode, but the quality is
less.
Understanding the System Menus |
97
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Output Size
Specifies the output paper size for the PDF file.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Layout
Specifies the output layout.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Default Color
Specifies the default output color.
❚
Admin Settings > PDF >
Detect Job Separator
Specifies whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files successively.
❚
Admin Settings >
Network
Use the Network menu to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer
through the wired or wireless network.
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
•When the Ethernet cable is disconnected, the Wi-Fi | WPS menu is available.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Checks or specifies network settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Specifies whether to enable the Wi-Fi feature.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Wi-Fi Status
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Status setting is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Checks the wireless communication status.
Auto % Prints the document in the layout specified by the printer.
100% (No Zoom) Prints in the same size as the document.
Booklet Prints on both sides of a sheet of paper bound by the edge.
2 Pages Up Prints two pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
4 Pages Up Prints four pages on one side of a sheet of paper.
Status Good
98
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi>
Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Setup Wizard is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the wireless network interface.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard >
Select access point
Selects the access point from the list.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard >
Manual SSID Setup
Configures the wireless settings using the operator panel manually.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup >
SSID
Specifies a name to identify the wireless network. Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can
be entered.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup > SSID >
Infrastructure
Selects when you configure the wireless setting through the access point such as a
wireless.
Acceptable
Low
No Reception
SSID Displays the name that identifies the wireless network.
Encryption Type Displays the encryption type.
WEP Key When you select an access point using WEP as the encryption type,
enter the WEP key.
PassPhrase When you select an access point using WPA, WPA2, or Mixed as the
encryption type, enter the passphrase.
No Security Specifies No Security to configure the wireless setting without
specifying an encryption type from WEP and WPA-PSK-AES.
Mixed mode PSK Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
Mixed mode PSK. Mixed mode PSK automatically selects the
encryption type from either WPA-PSK-AES or WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
WPA2-PSK-AES Selects to configure the wireless setting with the encryption type of
WPA2-PSK-AES.
Passphrase Specifies the passphrase of alphanumeric characters from 8 to 63.
(hex: 0-9, a-f, A-F, 16 to 64 characters)
WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit
keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from Auto and WEP Key 1 - 4.
Understanding the System Menus |
99
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Setup Wizard > Manual SSID Setup > SSID >
Ad-hoc
Selects to configure the wireless setting without the access point such as a wireless
router.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
WPS Setup
NOTE:
•WPS Setup is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
•WPS Setup is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the wireless network using WPS.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
IP Mode
Configures the IP mode.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
TCP/IP
Configures TCP/IP settings.
No Security Configures the wireless setting without specifying the encryption type
from WEP.
WEP Specifies the WEP key to use through the wireless network. For 64bit
keys, up to 10 hexadecimal characters can be entered. For 128bit
keys, up to 26 hexadecimal characters can be entered.
Transmit Key Specifies the transmit key from WEP Key 1 - 4.
Push Button Configuration Configures the wireless setting with Wi-Fi Protected Setup-Push
Button Configuration (WPS-PBC) .
PIN Code Configures the wireless setting using the PIN code assigned by the
printer. You can also print the PIN code. Check it when entering PIN
assigned to the printer into your computer.
Dual Stack Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
Get IP Address AutoIP Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of
169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the
network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
RARP Sets the IP address using RARP.
DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Panel Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the
operator panel.
IP Address When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the
printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value
in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a
gateway address.
100
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
IPsec
NOTE:
•IPsec is displayed only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Disables IPsec.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Wi-Fi >
Reset Wi-Fi
NOTE:
•Reset Wi-Fi setting is available only when the printer is connected to the wireless network.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Initializes wireless network settings. After executing this setting and restarting the printer,
all wireless network settings are reset to their default values.
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Wi-Fi Direct
NOTE:
•When the Ethernet cable is connected, or Wi-Fi is set to Off, Wi-Fi Direct is disabled.
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255
cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes
up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any
value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet
of a gateway address.
Wi-Fi Direct Enables or disables the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Group Role Auto Automatically resolves the group role for Wi-Fi
Direct.
Group Owner Sets the printer as the Group Owner when using
Wi-Fi Direct. Setting the printer to become the
group owner makes it possible for mobile devices to
discover the printer. The SSID of the printer is
displayed in the list of wireless networks on your
mobile device.
Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi
Direct network with up to 32 alphanumeric
characters. Check it when selecting the printer
name on your mobile device.
Paired Device Displays the status of the Wi-Fi Direct connections
between the printer and up to 3 Wi-Fi mobile
devices.
Disconnect All Disconnect
now
Disconnects all the Wi-Fi Direct connections right
now.
Disconnect and
Reset
Passphrase
Disconnects the Wi-Fi Direct connections and
resets the passphrase.
Understanding the System Menus |
101
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Ethernet
NOTE:
•When using a wired network, the Wi-Fi | WPS menu is not available.
Checks or specifies network settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
IP Mode
Configures the IP mode.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
TCP/IP
Configures TCP/IP settings.
SSID Displays the name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct
network. You can also specify the name with up to
32 alphanumeric characters. "DIRECT-XX" cannot be
changed. Check it when selecting the Wi-Fi Direct
network name on your mobile device.
Passphrase Displays the passphrase. Check it when entering the
passphrase into your mobile device.
Print
Passphrase
Prints the passphrase. Check it when entering the
passphrase into your mobile device.
Reset
Passphrase
Resets the passphrase.
WPS Setup Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using WPS.
Push Button
Configuration
Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network with Wi-Fi
Protected Setup-Push Button Configuration
(WPS-PBC).
PIN Code Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using PIN code
assigned by the printer.
Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code. Check it when entering PIN
assigned to the printer into your mobile device.
Reset Code Resets the PIN code.
Dual Stack Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address.
IPv4 Mode
IPv6 Mode
Get IP Address AutoIP Sets the IP address automatically. A random value in the range of
169.254.1.0 to 169.254.254.255 that is not currently in use on the
network is set as the IP address. The subnet mask is set as 255.255.0.0.
BOOTP Sets the IP address using BOOTP.
RARP Sets the IP address using RARP.
DHCP Sets the IP address using DHCP.
Panel Use this option when you want to set the IP address manually on the
operator panel.
102
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
IPsec
NOTE:
•IPsec is displayed only when IPsec is enabled on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Disables IPsec.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Ethernet >
Connection Speed
NOTE:
•The Connection Speed setting is available only when the printer is connected to the wired
network.
Specifies the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Protocols
Enables or disables each protocol. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
IP Address When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is allocated to the
printer using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any value
in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet of a
gateway address.
Subnet Mask When an IP address is being set manually, the subnet mask is specified
using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.255.255.255.255
cannot be specified as the subnet mask.
Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the gateway address is
specified using the format nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes
up nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254. 127 and any
value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot be specified for the first octet
of a gateway address.
Auto
10BASE-T Half
10BASE-T Full
100BASE-TX Half
100BASE-TX Full
1000BASE-T Full
LPD
Port9100
FTP
IPP
SMB TCP/IP
WSD Print
*1
WSD Scan
Network TWAIN
SNMP UDP
*2
Understanding the System Menus |
103
*1
Stands for Web Services on Devices
*2
Stands for Simple Network Management Protocol
*3
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Advanced Settings
Specifies advanced network settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
IP Filter
NOTE:
•The IP Filter setting is available only for LPD or Port9100.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Specifies whether to block data received through the wired or wireless network.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
IEEE 802.1x
NOTE:
•IEEE 802.1x is displayed only when the printer is connected using Ethernet cable and it is available
only when the IEEE 802.1x authentication is enabled.
Disables IEEE 802.1x authentication. The change becomes effective after the printer is
turned off and then on again.
❚
Admin Settings > Network > Advanced Settings >
PS Data Format
Specifies PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface,
you can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
E-mail Alert
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Bonjour(mDNS)
Telnet
Update Address Book
HTTP-SSL/TLS
Google Cloud Print
Print from Dell Document Hub
*3
Scan to Dell Document Hub
*3
IPv4-Filter Enables or disables IPv4 Filter.
IPv6-Filter Enables or disables IPv6 Filter.
Auto Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible
communication protocol.
Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and
binary data to switch between them according to the specified
control code.
Binary Used when no special processing is required for data.
104
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Reset LAN
Initializes wired network data stored in non-volatile memory (NVM). After executing this
setting and restarting the printer, all wired network settings are reset to their default
values.
❚
Admin Settings > Network >
Delete All Certificates
Deletes all certificates of the printer. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all certificates are deleted.
❚
Admin Settings >
Fax Settings
Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Fax Line Settings
Configures basic settings for the fax line.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Fax Number
Sets the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of a fax message.
NOTE:
•Make sure to specify Fax Number before using Junk Fax Setup.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Country
Selects the country where the printer is used.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Fax Header Name
Sets the sender name to be printed on the header on faxes.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Line Type
Specifies the default line type to PSTN or PBX.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
Line Monitor
Specifies whether to enable the Line Monitor setting. Set the volume of the line monitor,
which audibly monitors a transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is
made.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Line Settings >
DRPD Pattern
Provides a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern.
Understanding the System Menus |
105
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Incoming Defaults
Configures settings for incoming fax.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Receive Mode
Selects the default fax receiving mode.
Pattern1–7 Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) is a service provided by
some telephone companies. DRPD Patterns are specified by your
telephone company. The following shows the patterns provided with
the printer.
Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use
this service. For example, Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility
distinctive ringing pattern: rings for 400 ms, stops for 800 ms, rings
for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms. This pattern is repeated over and
over again. This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence(s)
DA4 in New Zealand.
Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking
up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the
remote receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook
and then tapping Receive.
Fax Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone / Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the
printer starts receiving the fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the
printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a
telephone call.
Pattern1
Pattern2
Pattern3
Pattern4
Pattern5
Pattern6
Pattern7
106
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Ring Tone Volume
Specifies whether to enable the Ring Tone Volume setting. Set the volume of the ring
tone, which indicates that an incoming call is a telephone call through the internal
speaker when Receive Mode is set to Telephone / Fax.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Auto Receive Setup
Configures settings for automatic fax reception.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Junk Fax Setup
Specifies whether to enable the Junk Fax Setup feature, which rejects unwanted faxes by
accepting faxes only from the fax numbers registered in the Phone Book.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Secure Receive
NOTE:
•The Secure Receive feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to require a password to print received faxes, and to set or change the
password.
*
This item is available only when Secure Receive Set is set to Enable.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Received Fax Forward
Sets whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination.
Ans Machine/Fax This mode is intended for use with an answering machine. When the
answering machine receives the call, the printer monitors the call for
fax tones. When the printer detects fax tones, the printer
automatically receives the fax. When the answering machine is off,
the printer goes into the Fax mode after the ring tone sounds for a
predefined time. If the phone communication in your country is serial,
this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure
the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Auto Receive Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after receiving an incoming call.
Auto Receive Tel/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive Ans/Fax Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Secure Receive Set Sets to require a password to print received faxes.
Change Password
*
Sets or changes the four-digit password required to print received
faxes.
Off
Understanding the System Menus |
107
*1
Depending on the e-mail server settings, the printer may not get an error which occurs during the transfer.
*2
This item is available only when the E-Mail Server information is registered. See "E-Mail Server."
*3
This item is available only when Forwarding E-mail Address is registered. See "Fax Settings."
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to enable the 2 Sided Print feature, which sets the duplex printing for
fax.
NOTE:
•Duplex print may not be done depending on the size of the received faxes or settings of the trays,
etc.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Remote Receive
Specifies whether to enable the Remote Receive feature, which receives a fax by
pressing a remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset
of the telephone. You can specify the tone in two digits to start Remote Receive.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Incoming Defaults >
Discard Size
Specifies whether to enable the Discard Size feature, which sets the printer to discard
images or any text at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit the
output paper. You can also set to automatically reduce a fax page to fit it onto the
appropriate paper size.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Transmission Defaults
Configures settings for transmitting fax.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Auto Redial Setup
Configures settings for automatic redial.
Forward Forwards incoming faxes to a specified destination. Prints incoming
faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Forwarding
Number
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes
are forwarded.
Print and
Forward
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified
destination.
Forwarding
Number
Specifies the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes
are forwarded.
Forward to
Email
*1,2,3
Forwards incoming faxes to specified e-mail addresses. Prints
incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Print and
Forward to
E-mail
*2,3
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified e-mail
address.
Forward to
Server
Forwards incoming faxes to a specified server address. Prints
incoming faxes if an error occurs during the transfer.
Print and
Forward to
Server
Prints incoming faxes and also forwards them to a specified server
address.
108
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Tone / Pulse
Selects the dialing type.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Prefix Dial
Specifies whether to enable the Prefix Dial feature, which sets a prefix dial number. You
can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before any auto dial
number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange
(PABX).
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Fax Cover Page
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Cover Page feature, which sets to attach a cover
page to faxes.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Fax Header
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Header feature, which prints the sender information
on the header of the faxes.
NOTE:
•If United States is selected for the setting of Country, this option does not appear on the
menu. The setting is fixed to On and cannot be changed. See "Specifying the Fax Initial Settings
Using the Operator Panel.”
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
ECM
Specifies whether to enable the ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature. To use the ECM,
the remote machines must also support the ECM.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Modem Speed
Adjusts the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Transmission Defaults >
Display Manual Fax Recipients
Specifies whether to enable the Display Manual Fax Recipients feature, which displays
the fax number of the recipient on the Sending Fax screen when manually sending a
fax.
Redial Attempts Sets the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax
number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer does not redial.
Interval of Redial Sets the interval between redial attempts.
Resend Delay Sets the interval between re-send attempts.
Tone Uses tone dialing.
Pulse(10PPS) Sets Dial Pulse, 10 Pulse Per Second as the dial type.
Pulse(20PPS) Sets Dial Pulse, 20 Pulse Per Second as the dial type.
Understanding the System Menus |
109
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings >
Fax Reports
Configures settings for fax reports.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Activity
Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50 incoming and
outgoing fax communications.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Transmit
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Broadcast
Sets whether to print a transmission result after a fax transmission to multiple
destinations.
❚
Admin Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Reports >
Fax Protocol
Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report, which helps you identify the cause of
a communication problem.
❚
Admin Settings >
System Settings
Use System Settings to configure the power saving mode, warning tones, time-out
duration, display language, and job log auto print settings.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
General
Configures general settings for the printer.
Auto Print
No Auto Print
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission.
Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to
multiple destinations.
Print Always Prints a protocol monitor report after every fax transmission.
Print On Error Prints the protocol monitor report only when an error occurs.
Print Disable Does not print the protocol monitor report.
110
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Power Saver Timer
Specifies the time for transition to power saver mode.
When you specify 1 minute for Sleep, the printer enters power saver mode 1 minute
after it finishes a job. This uses much less energy, but requires more warm-up time for
the printer. Specify 1 minute if the printer shares an electrical circuit with room lighting
and you notice lights flickering.
Select a high value if the printer is in constant use. In most circumstances, this keeps the
printer ready to operate with minimum warm-up time.
Select a medium value if you want a balance between energy consumption and a shorter
warm-up period.
The printer returns to the standby mode from the power saver mode when it receives
data from the computer or remote fax machine. You can also change the status of the
printer to the standby mode by pressing any button on the operator panel.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Date & Time
Specifies the date and time formats.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
mm / inch
Specifies the default measurement unit displayed after the numeric value on the touch
panel.
NOTE:
•The default for mm / inch varies depending on other settings, such as Country and Document
Size.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Screen Brightness
Adjusts the screen brightness of the touch panel.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Audio Tone
Specifies whether to enable the Audio Tone feature, which emits a tone during operation
or when a warning message appears.
Sleep Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter the Sleep mode after it
finishes a job.
Deep Sleep Specifies the time taken by the printer to enter the Deep Sleep mode
after it has entered Sleep mode.
Power Off Timer Specifies whether to enable the Power Off Timer and the time taken
by the printer to enter the Power Off Timer mode after it has entered
the Deep Sleep mode.
Time Zone Sets the time zone.
Date Sets the date depending on the Format settings.
Format Sets the date format.
Time Sets the time.
Format Sets the time format.
Understanding the System Menus |
111
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Low Toner Alert Message
Specifies whether to enable the Low Toner Alert Message feature, which shows the alert
message when the toner is low.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
OffHook Wake Up
Specifies whether to enable the OffHook Wake Up feature, which wakes up from the
Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you pick up the handset of the external telephone.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Auto Log Print
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Log Print feature, which automatically prints a job
history report after every 20 jobs.
Print logs can also be printed using the Report / List menu.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
RAM Disk
Specifies whether to enable the RAM Disk feature, which allocates memory to the RAM
disk file system for the Secure Print, Private MailBox Print, Public Mail Box Print, and
Proof Print features. The change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and
then on again.
NOTE:
•Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings for the RAM Disk menu.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Fax Server Phone Book
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Server Phone Book feature, which searches the
Control Panel Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is
correct.
Invalid Key Selects the volume for a tone when the operator panel input is
incorrect.
Machine Ready Selects the volume for a tone when the printer is ready to process a
job.
Copy Completed Selects the volume for a tone when a copy job is complete.
Job Completed Selects the volume for a tone when a job other than a copy job is
complete.
Fault Tone Selects the volume for a tone when a job ends abnormally.
Alert Tone Selects the volume for a tone when a problem occurs.
Out of Paper Selects the volume for a tone when the printer runs out of paper.
Low Toner Alert Selects the volume for a tone when a toner is low.
Auto Clear Alert Selects the volume for a tone 5 seconds before the printer performs
auto clear.
NFC Authentication
*
Selects the volume for a tone when an NFC card is placed on the NFC
reader for authentication.
All Tones Selects the volume for all the alert tones.
112
| Understanding the System Menus
phone numbers from the Phone Book for the LDAP server.
NOTE:
•You can search the phone numbers only from the local Phone Book when Fax Server Phone
Book is set to Off.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
E-mail Server Address Book
Specifies whether to enable the E-mail Server Address Book feature, which searches the
e-mail addresses from the Address Book for the LDAP server.
NOTE:
•You can search the e-mail addresses only from the local Address Book when E-mail Server
Address Book is set to Off.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Power On Wizard
Performs initial setup for the printer.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > General >
Max E-mail Size
Specifies the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Timers
Configures timer settings.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Timers >
Auto Reset
Automatically resets the settings for Copy, Scan, Fax, E-mail, or Print to the default
settings and return to the standby mode after you do not specify any settings for the
specified time.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Timers >
Fault Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the Fault Time-out feature, which specifies the amount of
time the printer waits before canceling a job that stops abnormally. The print job is
canceled if the time-out time is exceeded.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Output Settings
Configures settings concerning output from the printer.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Default Paper Size
Specifies the default paper size.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Print ID
Specifies whether to enable the Print ID feature, which specifies a location where the
Understanding the System Menus |
113
user ID is printed.
NOTE:
•When printing on DL size paper, a part of the user ID may not be printed correctly.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Print Text
Specifies whether to enable the Print Text feature. This feature outputs Page Description
Language (PDL) data, which is not supported by the printer, as text when the printer
receives it. Text data is printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Banner Sheet
Specifies the position of banner sheet, and also specify the tray in which the banner
sheet is loaded.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Substitute Tray
Specifies whether to use paper of a different size when the paper that is loaded in the
specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the current job.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Letterhead 2 Sided
Specifies whether to enable the Letterhead 2 Sided feature, which prints on both sides
when using letterhead.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
A4<>Letter Switch
Specifies whether to enable the A4<>Letter Switch feature. This feature prints A4 size
jobs on Letter size paper if A4 size paper is not available or to print Letter size jobs on A4
size paper if Letter size paper is not available.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
A5<>Statement Switch
Specifies whether to enable the A5<>Statement Switch feature. This feature prints A5
size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 size paper is not available or to print Statement
size jobs on A5 size paper if Statement size paper is not available.
Insert Position Off Does not print the banner sheet.
Front Inserted before the first page of every copy.
Back Inserted after the last page of every copy.
Front & Back Inserted before the first page of every copy and after the last page of
every copy.
Specify Tray The banner sheet is loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder
(MPF)/tray1/optional 550-sheet feeder.
Off No tray size substitute accepted.
Larger Size Substitutes paper of next largest size. When there is no larger paper
size, the printer substitutes paper of nearest size.
Nearest Size Substitutes paper of nearest size.
Use MPF Substitutes paper from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
114
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Report 2 Sided Print
Specifies whether to print reports on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Use Another Tray
Specifies whether to enable the Use Another Tray feature, which changes to another
paper tray when paper runs out in the specified paper tray.
NOTE:
•The size of image to print is not adjusted automatically. If you select another paper tray with paper
size smaller than the paper size specified in the job, the parts that are larger than the print media
are not printed.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings > Output Settings >
Resume Printing After Jam Recovery
Specifies whether to enable the Resume Printing After Jam Recovery feature. This
feature deletes print job after recovering from paper jam.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Set Available Time
Sets the available time for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions.
NOTE:
•Set Available Time can be configured when Print, Copy, Scan, or Fax is set to On.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE:
•Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
ColorTrack Mode
Specifies whether to enable the ColorTrack Mode feature, which limits access to color
printing.
Copy/Scan/Fax/
Print
Set Available
Time
Specifies whether to set the time when function is available.
Start Time
End Time
Recurrence Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Expiration Mode Sets whether to enable or disable the Secure Job Expiration feature.
Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Recurrence Sets the recurrence to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the
RAM disk.
Weekly Setting Sets the day of the week to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
Monthly Setting Sets the day of the month to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
Understanding the System Menus |
115
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Non Registered User
Specifies whether to enable the Non Registered User feature, which permits the printing
of data without authentication information.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Auto Color To Mono Print
NOTE:
•The Auto Color To Mono Print feature is available when Dell ColorTrack is disabled.
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Color To Mono Print feature, which prints all print
jobs in black and white even when color print is specified.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
ColorTrack Error Report
Specifies whether to enable the ColorTrack Error Report feature, which prints
error-related information if printing with ColorTrack results in an error.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
NFC - Tap to Print
Specifies whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or a notebook
computer by tapping the device to the (NFC) reader.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚
Admin Settings > System Settings >
Calibration
Specifies tray to calibrate the machine regularly. This feature corrects consistency of
printing colors over time, environment and print media.
❚
Admin Settings >
Maintenance
Use the Maintenance menu to initialize the non-volatile (NV) memory, configure the
plain paper quality adjustment settings, and configure the security settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Paper Density
Specifies paper density settings.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Transfer Belt Unit
Adjusts the transfer bias when the faint image of the previous page, a part of the page
currently printing, etc. appear on the output.
K Offset If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.
YMC Offset If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to
decrease the value.
116
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust 2nd BTR
NOTE:
•The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Specifies the transfer roller voltage adjustment for each paper type. If you see mottles on
the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the print output, try
to decrease the voltage.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Fusing Unit
NOTE:
•The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Adjusts the temperature setting of the fusing unit for each paper type. When the
printouts are curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the
paper properly, try to increase the temperature.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Color Reg Adjust
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clean Developer
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Toner Refresh
Cleans the toner in the drum cartridge.
NOTE:
•The Toner Refresh feature uses the toner, and shorten the life of the toner cartridge and the drum
cartridge.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Reset Defaults
Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Initialize Print Meter
Initializes the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter
count is reset to zero.
Auto Correct Automatically performs color registration correction.
User Fax Section Initializes the fax number entries in the Address Book.
User Scan Section Initializes the e-mail and server address entries in the Address Book.
User Account Section Initializes the user registration information.
User App Section Initializes the widget application information.
System Section Initializes the system parameters.
Understanding the System Menus |
117
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clear Stored Jobs
NOTE:
•The Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Clears all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public Mail box Print, Proof
Print, and Stored Print in the RAM disk.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Non-Dell Toner
Specifies whether to enable the Non-Dell Toner feature, which uses toner cartridge of
another manufacturer.
CAUTION:
• Using a non-Dell™ toner cartridge may severely damage the printer. The warranty does not
cover damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Adjust Altitude
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric
pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the
printer is being used.
NOTE:
•An incorrect altitude adjustment setting leads to poor printing quality, incorrect indication of
remaining toner, etc.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Decrease Ghosting
Reduces negative ghost.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Clear Job History
Clears the job history of all finished jobs.
❚
Admin Settings > Maintenance >
Fax Line Test
NOTE:
•The Fax Line Test feature is not available when the Fax function is disabled.
Tests if the voltage supply from the fax line is sufficient.
❚
Admin Settings >
Secure Settings
Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the menus. This
All Deletes all files stored as Secure Print, Private Mail Box Print, Public
Mail Box Print, and Proof Print in the RAM disk.
Secure Document Deletes all files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document Deletes all files stored as Stored Print in the RAM disk.
118
| Understanding the System Menus
prevents items from being changed accidentally.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Panel Lock
Specifies whether to enable the Panel Lock feature, which sets a limited access to Admin
Settings with a password, and to set or change the password.
*
This item is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Functions Control
NOTE:
•The Functions Control setting is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to enable or disable each of the printer functions, or to restrict the use
of a function with a password. For Copy and USB Direct Print, you can restrict just
the color printing and color copying features with a password.
Panel Lock Control Sets password protection for Admin Settings.
Change Password
*
Sets or changes the four-digit password required to access Admin
Settings.
Copy Enables or disables the Copy function.
You can also restrict the function with a password by setting to On
(Password) or On (Color Password).
Scan to E-mail Enables or disables the Scan to E-mail feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
Fax Enables or disables the Fax function.
You can also restrict the function with a password using On
(Password).
Fax Driver Enables or disables the Fax Driver function.
Scan to Network
Folder
Enables or disables the Scan to Network Folder feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
Scan to
Computer
Enables or disables the Scan to Computer feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using
On(Password).
PC Scan Enables or disables the PC Scan feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
Scan to USB Enables or disables the Scan to USB feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password).
USB Direct Print Enables or disables the USB Direct Print feature.
You can also restrict the feature with a password using On
(Password) or On (Color Password).
ID Copy Enables or disables the ID Copy feature.
USB Service Show When
Inserted
Enables or disables this setting to show the USB Drive Detected
screen when a USB memory is inserted in to the printer.
Understanding the System Menus |
119
*
This item is available only when On (Password) or On (Color Password) is enabled.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Desktop Authentication
Specifies the Desktop Authentication method.
NOTE:
•Desktop Authentication is displayed on Dell S2825cdn only.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Edit E-mail From Fields
Specifies whether to enable the Edit E-mail From Fields feature, which enables editing of
the transmission source when you use Scan to Email.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Reconfirm Recipient
Specifies whether to reconfirm the recipient before sending a fax or scan.
NOTE:
•If the Reconfirm Recipient menu is set to Reconfirm Recipient, recipients can only be
selected from the phone book or the address book. You cannot directly enter an address or fax
number.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Domain Filtering
Specifies whether to enable the Domain Filtering feature, which sends e-mails to
specified domains.
NOTE:
•Set the domains from SMTP Domain Filtering on the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Software Download
Specifies whether to enable the Software Download feature, which enables download of
firmware updates.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Display of Network Information
Shows or hides network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Automatic Doc
Detected Menu
Enables or disables this feature for the printer to detect document
loaded in the DADF and show DADF related menus on the touch
panel.
Change
Password
*
Changes the four-digit password that is set under the Functions
Control menu.
Local Authentication Use the local authentication method.
Remote Authentication Use the remote authentication method.
No Confirmation Does not display a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is
actually sent.
Reconfirm Recipient Displays a screen to reconfirm the recipient before the job is actually
sent.
120
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
Login Error
NOTE:
•Login Error feature is available only when Panel Lock Control is set to Enable.
Specifies whether to enable the Login Error feature, which specifies the number of error
entry attempts allowed when you log in as an administrator in Admin Settings and the
Report / List menu.
❚
Admin Settings > Secure Settings >
NFC Authentication
Specifies whether to enable the NFC Authentication setting, which enables the
authentication using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚
Admin Settings >
USB Settings
Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port.
❚
Admin Settings > USB Settings >
USB Port
NOTE:
•USB Port setting is available only for the USB port on the rear of the printer.
Specifies whether to enable the USB Port setting, which enables the USB Port. The
change becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
❚
Admin Settings > USB Settings >
PS Data Format
Specifies PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for a parallel interface.
You can configure the PS Data Format settings for the wired network. The change
becomes effective after the printer is turned off and then on again.
Show IPv4 Address
Show Host Name
Hide Network Information
Auto Used when auto-detecting the PostScript Level3 Compatible
communication protocol.
Standard Used when the communication protocol is in ASCII interface.
BCP Used when the communication protocol is in binary format.
TBCP Used when the communication protocol supports both ASCII and
binary data to switch between them according to the specified
control code.
Binary Used when no special processing is required for data.
Understanding the System Menus |
121
❚
Admin Settings > USB Settings >
Job Time-out
Specifies whether to enable the Job Time-out feature, which specifies the amount of
time the printer waits for data to arrive from the computer. The print job is canceled if
the time-out time is exceeded.
Default Settings
Use Default Settings menu to modify the Copy, Scan, or Fax menu defaults.
To display the Default Settings menu, press the (Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚
Default Settings >
Copy Defaults
Modifies the Copy menu defaults. Copy Defaults allows you to configure the
following items in addition to the items under the Copy menu. See "Copy."
❚
Default Settings > Copy Defaults >
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the default background suppression level to Normal/High/Highest.
❚
Default Settings > Copy Defaults >
Color Balance
Sets the color balance level of low/medium/high density for each color.
❚
Default Settings >
Fax Defaults
Modifies the Fax menu defaults. Fax Defaults allows you to configure the items
under the Fax menu. See "Fax.”
❚
Default Settings >
Scan Defaults
Modifies the Scan menu defaults. Scan Defaults allows you to configure the
following items in addition to the items under the Scan menu. See "Scan Settings."
❚
Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
Auto Exposure Level
Sets the default background suppression level.
❚
Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
TIFF File Format
Specifies the default TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
❚
Default Settings > Scan Defaults >
Image Compression
Sets the image compression level.
122
| Understanding the System Menus
❚
Default Settings >
Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults
Modifies the defaults for the Direct Print Defaults/USB Direct Print
Defaults menu. See "Print PDF/TIFF.”
NOTE:
•For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw, Direct Print Defaults is displayed. For Dell S2825cdn,
USB Direct Print Defaults is displayed.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to define the print media loaded in tray1 and the
optional 550-sheet feeder.
To display the Tray Management menu, press the (Information) button, and then
tap the Tools tab.
❚
Tray Management >
Tray Settings
Configures tray settings.
❚
Tray Management > Tray Settings >
MPF
Specifies the paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
❚
Tray Management > Tray Settings >
Tray1
Specifies the paper loaded in tray1.
NOTE:
•For details about supported paper sizes, see "Supported Print Media.”
Display Tray
Prompt
Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
paper type and paper size when paper is loaded in the MPF. The
factory default is on (selected).
MPF Mode Use Panel
Settings
Uses the paper size and type specified on the operator panel.
Use Printer
Driver Settings
Uses the paper size and type specified on the print driver.
Manual When the print job is started, the printer pauses the job and shows the
screen to prompt the user to load the paper of the specified size and
type. To continue the job, check that the specified paper is loaded,
and then tap Continue in the screen on the touch panel.
Size Specifies the paper size.
Type Specifies the paper type.
Display Tray Prompt Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in tray1. The factory
default is on (selected).
Size Specifies the paper size.
Type Specifies the paper type.
Understanding the System Menus |
123
❚
Tray Management > Tray Settings >
Tray2
NOTE:
•The Tray2 setting is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Specifies the paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
❚
Tray Management >
Tray Priority
Sets the priority order of the paper trays for automatic tray selection. If paper trays
loaded with the same paper size and type exists, the paper tray is selected according to
this priority order.
Language Settings
Use the Language Settings menu to configure Panel Language, or Keyboard
Layout.
To display the Language Settings menu, press the (Information) button, and
then tap the Tools tab.
❚
Language Settings >
Panel Language
Determines the language of the text on the touch panel.
❚
Language Settings >
Keyboard Layout
Selects the keyboard layout on the touch panel.
Resetting Defaults
After executing this setting and restarting the printer, the phone book, address book, or
menu parameters are reset to their default values.
The following menu parameters are exceptions and are not reset.
•Network settings
•Panel Lock settings and password
•Functions Control settings for Copy, Scan to E-mail, Fax, Scan to Network
Folder, Scan to Computer, PC Scan, Scan to USB, USB Direct Print and
saved passwords
•Secure Receive settings and saved password
•Login Error settings
•Set Available Time settings
•Secure Job Expiration settings
•USB Port settings
Display Tray Prompt Select the checkbox to display a popup message that prompts to set
Paper Type and Paper Size when paper is loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder. The factory default is on (selected).
Size Sets whether to specify the paper size automatically or manually.
Type Specifies the paper type.
124
| Understanding the System Menus
•ColorTrack Mode settings
•ColorTrack Error Report settings
•Non Registered User settings
•NFC Authentication settings
•Tap to Print settings
To reset the settings, perform the following procedure:
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Maintenance.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap until Reset Defaults appears, and then tap Reset Defaults.
4Tap the desired setting, and then tap Initialize.
5Tap Yes, Reset.
The printer restarts.
User Fax Section Resets the phone book data.
User Scan Section Resets the address book data.
User Account Section Resets the user registration information.
User App Section Resets the widget application information.
System Section Resets the system parameters.
Understanding the Job Menus |
125
Understanding the Job Menus
Print
Use the Print menus to configure various settings for the Secure Print, Private Mail Box
Print, Public Mail Box Print, and Proof Print features.
To display the Print job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then select
the Print tile.
❚
Print >
Secure Print
NOTE:
•Secure Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Secure Print.
❚
Print >
Private Mailbox
NOTE:
•Private Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Private Mailbox.
❚
Print >
Public Mailbox
NOTE:
•Public Mailbox feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Public Mailbox.
Select User ID Enters the password you specified on the print driver.
Select a Job Selects a job to print.
Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Print and Delete Prints the selected job, and then deletes the document from print
memory.
Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Select User ID Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job Selects a job to print.
Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Print Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Select User ID Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job Selects a job to print.
126
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Print >
Proof Print
NOTE:
•Proof Print feature is available only when RAM Disk is set to On.
Specifies whether and how to print the job stored as the Proof Print.
❚
Print >
Secure Fax Receive
Prints confidential faxes. The printer can hold the job in memory until you arrive at the
printer and type the password on the operator panel.
❚
Print >
Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tile for the Print menus.
Copy
Use the Copy menus to configure various settings for the copy function.
To display the Copy job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then select the
Copy tile.
❚
Copy >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies from 1 to 99.
❚
Copy >
Darken/Lighten
Makes the copy darker or lighter.
Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Print Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Select User ID Enters the password you specified on the print
driver.
Select a Job Selects a job to print.
Select All Selects all the documents stored for this User ID.
Quantity Specifies the quantity of printout.
Use Driver
Settings
Sets the quantity of prints specified on the print
driver.
Print Prints the selected job.
Print and Delete Deletes the document after it is printed.
Delete Deletes the specified document from print memory.
Understanding the Job Menus |
127
❚
Copy >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white copying.
❚
Copy >
Select Tray
Specifies the input tray.
*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
❚
Copy >
2 Sided Copying
Specifies whether to make duplex copy and select the binding position.
❚
Copy >
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer.
❚
Copy >
Reduce/Enlarge
Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image. You can also enter a custom ratio.
❚
Copy >
Original Size
Specifies the default document size.
NOTE:
•When Auto is selected, the printer assumes that the document size is the size of the print media
loaded in tray1 or the MPF.
MPF The paper is fed from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). When Use
Printer Driver Settings is set in MPF Configuration of Tray
Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the copy
job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as
the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to
specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify
the paper size and type.
Paper Size Specifies the paper size.
Paper Type Specifies the paper type.
Tray1
Tray2
*
1 1 Sided Copies one-sided documents into one-sided printouts.
1 2 Sided Copies one-sided documents into two-sided printouts. You can
specify whether the printout is bound by the long edge or short edge.
2 1 Sided Copies two-sided documents into one-sided printouts. Before
starting the copy, you need to specify whether the document is
bound by the long edge or short edge.
2 2 Sided Copies two-sided documents into two-sided printouts. Before
starting the copy, you need to specify whether the document is
bound by the long edge or short edge.
128
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Copy >
Original Type
Improves the image quality by selecting the type of the document.
❚
Copy >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the copy job. For example, if you make two copies of
three-page document, one complete set of three-page document is printed one by one.
You can also automatically sort a copy job only when you use the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF).
❚
Copy >
2-Up
Prints every two pages of documents to fit onto one sheet of paper.
❚
Copy >
Color Saturation
Adjusts the amount of colors to make the colors darker or lighter.
❚
Copy >
Margin
Specifies the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the copy.
❚
Copy >
Auto Exposure
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Exposure feature, which suppresses the
background of the original to enhance text on the copy.
❚
Copy >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of copy features. And also use to create and edit
custom tiles for copying.
ID Copy
Use the ID Copy menus to configure various settings for ID Copy features.
To display the ID Copy job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then select
the ID Copy tile.
Off
Auto Automatically reduces to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Manual Specify the reduce/enlarge ratio in Reduce/Enlarge.
Understanding the Job Menus |
129
❚
ID Copy >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for ID Copy features. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for ID Copy.
Scan to Email
Use the Scan to Email menus to use the e-mail to send the scanned data. See "Scan
Settings."
To display the Scan to Email job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and
then select the Scan to Email tile.
Scan to Network Folder
Use the Scan to Network Folder menus to store the scanned data on a network
server or a computer. See "Scan Settings."
To display the Scan to Network job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and
then select the Scan to Network tile.
Scan to USB
Use the Scan to USB menus to save the scanned data to a USB flash drive attached to
the printer. See "Scan Settings."
To display the Scan to USB job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then
select the Scan to USB tile.
Quantity See "Copy."
Darken/Lighten
Output Color
Select Tray
Sharpness
Color Saturation
Auto Exposure
Reduce/Enlarge
Enter
Recipient's
Address
Enters the e-mail address of the recipient using the keyboard.
Address Book Individuals Selects an e-mail address from the local address book.
Groups Selects an e-mail group from the local address book.
Network
Address Book
Searches an e-mail address from the server address book.
Sender Keyboard Enters the e-mail address of the sender using the keyboard.
Address Book Selects an e-mail address of the sender from the local address book.
Network
Address Book
Searches an e-mail address of the sender from the server address
book.
Address Book Selects an FTP address or Server Message Block (SMB) protocol
address from the local address book.
Folder Name Selects which folder the scanned data is saved to.
130
| Understanding the Job Menus
Scan to Computer
Use the Scan to Computer to save scanned data on a computer.
To display the Scan to Computer job menu, press the (Home) button, tap ,
and then select the Scan to Computer tile.
NOTE:
•This feature is available when the operating system of the client computer is Windows Vista
®
SP2 or
later, Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8, Windows
®
8.1, or Windows
®
10.
❚
Scan to Computer >
Tile Settings
Use the tile settings to create and edit custom tiles for Scan to Computer.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer >
Scan Settings
NOTE:
•The scan settings are common for Scan to Email, Scan to Network Folder, Scan to USB, and Scan
to Computer features.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white scanning.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Resolution
Specifies the resolution of the scanned data.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
2 Sided Scanning
Specifies whether to scan one side or both sides of a document. For a two-sided
document, specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or short edge.
Computer (via
USB)
Saves scanned data on a computer connected via USB cable.
Computer Name Selects which computer the scanned data is saved to. Up to 20
computers can be listed.
Scan Sends the scanned data to the computer according to the chosen
event. The program associated with depends on the setting on the
computer.
Scan for Print
Scan for Email
Scan for Fax
Scan for OCR
Color
Black & White Works well for documents with texts.
Gray Scale Works well for documents with texts and photos.
Understanding the Job Menus |
131
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Darken/Lighten
Adjusts the density to make the scanned data darker or lighter.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of scanned data. Higher contrast makes the colors darker and lower
contrast makes the colors lighter than the original.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Sharpness
Adjusts the sharpness to make the scanned data sharper or softer.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Auto Exposure
Specifies whether to enable the Auto Exposure feature, which suppresses the
background of the original to enhance text on the scanned data.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Original Size
Specifies the default paper size.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Margin
Specifies the top, bottom, right, left, and middle margins of the scanned data.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
Create Folder
NOTE:
•Create Folder feature is available only for Scan to USB or Scan to Network Folder.
Specifies whether to enable the Create Folder feature, which creates a folder when
saving scanned data.
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer > Scan Settings >
File Naming Mode
Specifies the detailed setting of File Naming Mode.
Auto Sets the default file name.
Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
132
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Scan to Email / Scan to Network Folder / Scan to USB / Scan to Computer >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for the scan function when using Scan to
Email, Scan to USB, Scan to Network Folder, or Scan to Computer. And also use to
create and edit custom tiles for scanning.
Fax
Use the Fax menus to configure various settings for the fax function.
To display the Fax job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then select the
Fax tile.
NOTE:
•The Fax function cannot be used unless you set up a country code under Country. If Country is
not set up, a message Set the Country Code appears on the touch panel.
❚
Fax >
Fax Settings
Use the fax settings to configure various settings for the fax function.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Darken/Lighten
Adjusts the density to make the fax darker or lighter.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
2 Sided Scanning
Specifies whether to scan one side or both sides of a document. For a two-sided
document, specify whether the document is bound by the long edge or short edge.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Polling Receive
Specifies whether to enable the Polling Receive feature, which retrieves faxes from the
remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Resolution
Specifies the scan resolution to improve the output quality.
Enter Number Enters the fax number using the keyboard.
Speed Dial Enters the speed dial number stored in the printer.
Phone Book Individuals Selects a fax number from the local address book.
Groups Selects a group dial number from the local address book.
Network Phone
Book
Searches a fax number from the server address book.
On Hook Send Sends faxes manually.
Receive Receives faxes manually.
Polling Manually retrieves information from a remote machine.
Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Understanding the Job Menus |
133
NOTE:
•Data scanned in the Super Fine mode is transmitted at the highest resolution supported by the
remote machine.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Fax Cover Page
Specifies whether to enable the Fax Cover Page feature, which attaches a cover page to
faxes.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Delayed Send
Specifies whether to enable the Delayed Send feature, which sends a fax at a later time.
NOTE:
•A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored.
❚
Fax > Fax Settings >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save various settings for the fax function. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for faxing.
NOTE:
•Up to 30 addresses can be stored on the printer.
Print PDF/TIFF
NOTE:
•Print PDF/TIFF feature is available only when a USB flash drive is inserted in the front USB port.
Use the Print PDF/TIFF menus to specify the document stored in the root, file, or
folder in a USB flash drive. See "Print Settings."
To display the Print PDF/TIFF job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and
then select the Print PDF/TIFF tile.
Print JPEG
NOTE:
•Print JPEG feature is available only when a USB flash drive is inserted in the front USB port.
Use the Print JPEG menus to specify the photos stored in the root, file, or folder in a
USB flash drive. See "Print Settings."
To display the Print JPEG job menu, press the (Home) button, tap , and then
select the Print JPEG tile.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The Super
Fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the
Super Fine mode. See the following note.
Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
134
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG >
Print Settings
Use the print settings to configure various settings for the print function when using
Print PDF/TIFF, Print JPEG.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Quantity
Specifies the number of copies from 1 to 99.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Output Color
Selects color or black and white printing.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Select Tray
Specifies the input tray.
*
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
2 Sided Printing
Specifies whether to print on one side or both sides of a sheet of print media. For a
two-sided printing, you can specify the printout to be bound by the long edge or short
edge.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Layout
Specifies the output layout. Select whether to print one, two, or four pages on one side
of a sheet of print media. If you select Off(No Scaling), the parts that do not fit are
not printed (print size is not adjusted automatically).
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Image Types
Sets the print image quality.
MPF The paper is fed from the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF). When Use
Printer Driver Settings is set in MPF Configuration of Tray
Settings, Any is displayed for Size and Type. If you start the print
job with Any as the paper size and type, A4 or Letter is selected as
the paper size and plain is selected as the paper type. If you want to
specify the size and type of paper in the MPF, select MPF and specify
the paper size and type.
Size Specifies the paper size.
Tray1
Tray2
*
Auto Prints PDF/TIFF files in the Text mode and JPEG files in the Photos
(Standard Quality) mode.
Photos (Standard Quality) Prints the photographic images at the standard quality.
Photos (High Quality) Prints the photographic images at the high quality.
Understanding the Job Menus |
135
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG > Print Settings >
Collation
Specifies whether to sort the job.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF > Print Settings >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚
Print PDF/TIFF / Print JPEG >
Save Settings
Use the save settings to save a variety of USB Direct Print features. And also use to create
and edit custom tiles for USB Direct Print.
Dell Document Hub
Use the Dell Document Hub menus to configure various settings for Dell Document
Hub.
To display the Dell Document Hub job menu, press the (Home) button, and then
tap the Dell Document Hub tile.
NOTE:
•Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
❚
Dell Document Hub >
Search for Files
Searches the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
❚
Dell Document Hub >
Browse for Files
Browses and prints the files saved in the selected cloud services.
Text Prints the text document at the standard quality.
Text Box Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are
displayed in the small previews.
Text Box Enters the keywords, such as the words including the file name.
Searches for the files in the current location or the selected cloud
services.
Sets the settings of the Print Settings.
Displays the selected files. The first three pages of each file are
displayed in the small previews.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Print Settings as Favorite.
136
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Dell Document Hub >
Scan
Scans the document and saves the scanned data in the cloud service.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Scan >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Scan >
File Name Option
Specifies the way to name the scanned data.
For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚
Dell Document Hub >
Smart OCR Scan
Scans the document using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and saves it in the cloud
service.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
File Name Enters the file name you want to use.
File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Tag Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned data. You can search
for the location across the cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Sorts the searching results by selecting the sorting order.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
Off
Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
File Name Enters the file name you want to use.
File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Tag Enters the tag you want to use.
Searches for the location to save the scanned data. You can search
for the location across the cloud services.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
Understanding the Job Menus |
137
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
Blank Page Removable
Specifies whether to enable the Blank Page Removable feature, which removes the blank
pages.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
Image Enhancement
Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Smart OCR Scan >
File Name Option
Specifies the way to name the scanned data.
For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚
Dell Document Hub >
E-mail Me
Scans the document and send to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
❚
Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚
Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
Off
Add Prefix Adds texts in front of the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Prefix is selected.
Add Suffix Adds texts after the file name.
Prefix/Suffix
String
Specifies the texts that are added when Add Suffix is selected.
File Format Selects the file format from the list to save the scanned data.
Subject Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
138
| Understanding the Job Menus
❚
Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
PDF Password
Enters the password when you print a PDF file secured with password to open the PDF
file.
❚
Dell Document Hub > E-mail Me >
Black Page Removable
Specifies whether to enable the Black Page Removable feature, which removes the
blank pages. For details about other settings, see "Scan Settings."
❚
Dell Document Hub >
Business Card Reader
Scans the business card and send vCard format data to you as an attached file of an
e-mail.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Business Card Reader >
File Format
Specifies the file format to save the scanned data.
❚
Dell Document Hub > Business Card Reader >
OCR Language
Specifies the language for the OCR.
Add App
Use the Add App menus to add a variety of tiles on the Home screen.
Subject Enters the subject you want to use.
Sets the settings of the Scan Settings.
Saves the settings of the Scan Settings as Favorite.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
139
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool to monitor the status of your network
printer without leaving your desk. You can view and/or change the printer settings,
monitor toner level, and acknowledge the timing of ordering replacement consumables.
If you are a network administrator, you can copy the printer settings to one or all printers
on the network using your web browser.
NOTE:
•This web tool is available only when the printer is connected to a network.
Preparing to Use the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool
Make sure that you activate JavaScript in your browser before using the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool.
Perform the following procedure to configure both the environment settings of your
web browser and the operator panel before using the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool.
NOTE:
•The Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool pages may be displayed with unreadable characters if the
pages were configured by the language different from the language of your web browser.
Setting Up Internet Explorer
®
Setting Up the Display Language
1Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2Select Languages in the General tab.
3Specify the display language in order of preference in the Language list.
Setting the IP Address of the Printer to Non-Proxy
1Select Internet Options from Tools on the menu bar.
2Click LAN Settings under Local Area Network (LAN) Settings in the Connections
tab.
3Perform either of the following:
•Clear the Use a proxy server for your LAN check box under Proxy server.
•Click Advanced, and then specify the IP address of the printer in the Do not use
proxy server for addresses beginning with text box under Exceptions.
Confirming the Menu on the Operator Panel
You can start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool only when Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool is set to Enable on the operator panel. Check the operator
panel setting if you cannot start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Protocols."
140
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of the printer in
your web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, verify the IP address by using the
operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping command. See
"Verifying the IP Settings."
Page Display Format
Top Frame
The top frame is located at the top of all pages. When the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool is activated, the current status and specifications of the printer are displayed in the
top frame on every page.
1Model Name Displays the model name of the printer.
2IPv4 Displays the IP address of the printer.
IPv6
3Location Displays location of the printer. The location can be changed in the
Basic Information section on the Print Server Settings page.
4Contact Person Displays the name of the printer administrator. The name can be
changed in the Basic Information section on the Print Server
Settings page.
5Event Panel Displays the indicator for the condition of the printer.
6Machine image Shows the bitmap image of the printer. The Printer Status menu
appears in the right frame when you click on the image.
1234 65
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
141
Left Frame
The left frame is located on the left side of all the pages. The menu titles displayed in the
left frame are linked to corresponding menus and pages. You can proceed to the
corresponding page by clicking their characters.
1Printer Status Provides immediate feedback on the printer supply status.
When a toner cartridge is running low, click the order supplies link on
the first screen to order a new toner cartridge.
2Printer Jobs Contains information on the details of the status regarding each
protocol or job.
3Printer Settings Displays the printer settings of the operator panel to configure the
settings from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
4Print Server Settings Configures the type of printer interface and the necessary conditions
for communications.
5Copy Printer Settings Copies the printer settings to another printer or printers on the
network.
NOTE:
•You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
6Print Volume Displays the printing history such as paper usage and restrictions of
color mode usage.
7Address Book Displays or edits the e-mail address, server address, and fax number
entries in the Address Book, or registers new entries.
NOTE:
•You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
8Printer Information Provides information on service calls, inventory reports, or the status
of current memory and engine code levels.
9Tray Management Provides information about the paper type and size for each tray.
10 E-Mail Server Settings
Overview
Opens the E-Mail Server menu in the Printer Server Settings menu to
configure E-Mail Server settings for Scan to Email, e-mail alert and
forwarding fax to email features.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
142
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Right Frame
The right frame is located on the right side of all the pages. The contents of the right
frame correspond to the menu that you select in the left frame. See "Details of the Menu
Items."
Buttons in the Right Frame
Changing the Settings of the Menu Items
Some menus allow you to change the printer settings through the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool. When you access these menus, the authentication window
appears on the screen. Enter a user name and password for the printer administrator by
11 Set Password Locks the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool with a password so that
the printer settings are not changed inadvertently.
NOTE:
•You must log in as an administrator to use this setting.
12 Online Help Links to the Dell Support website.
13 Order Supplies at: Links to the Dell website for ordering supplies.
14 Contact Dell Support at: Links to the Dell Support website.
15 Dell Document Hub at:
*
Links to the Dell Document Hub website.
1Refresh Button Receives the current printer configuration and updates the latest
information in the right frame.
2Apply New Settings Button Submits new settings made on the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool to the printer. The new settings replace the old settings of the
printer.
3Restore Settings Button Restores the old settings that existed before any changes were
made. New settings are not submitted to the printer.
321
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
143
following the prompts displayed in the dialog box.
The default user name is admin, and the default password is left blank (NULL). You can
change only the password in the Set Password page in the Security menu. The user
name cannot be changed. See "Set Password."
Details of the Menu Items
Left Frame Tab Menu Item
"Printer Status" "Printer Status" "Printer Status"
"Printer Events"
"Printer Information"
"Printer Jobs" "Printer Jobs" "Job List"
"Completed Jobs"
"Printer Settings" "Printer Settings Report" "Menu Settings"
"Reports"
"Printer Settings" "System Settings"
"Network Settings"
"USB Settings"
"PCL Settings"
"PS Settings"
"PDF Settings"
"Secure Settings"
"Copy Defaults"
"Copy Color Balance"
"Copy Settings"
"Fax Defaults"
"Fax Settings"
"Scan Defaults"
"Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct
Print Defaults"
"MIFARE Customized Card"
"Printer Maintenance" "Paper Density"
"Adjust Transfer Belt Unit"
"Adjust 2nd BTR"
"Adjust Fusing Unit"
"Color Registration Adjustments"
“Clean Developer”
"Reset Defaults"
"Initialize Print Meter"
"Clear Stored Jobs"
*1
"Non-Dell Toner"
"Adjust Altitude"
"Decrease Ghosting"
"Clock Settings"
"Web Link Customization"
"Print Server Settings" "Print Server Reports" "Print Server Setup Page"
144
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
*2
This item is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
*3
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
"E-Mail Server Setup Page"
"Print Server Settings" "Basic Information"
"Port Settings"
"TCP/IP"
"SMB"
"E-Mail Server"
"Bonjour (mDNS)"
"SNMP"
"Scan to Network Folder"
"SNTP"
"AirPrint"
"Mopria"
“Google Cloud Print”
"Dell Document Hub"
*5
"Proxy Server"
"Wi-Fi"
*2
"Wi-Fi Direct"
*4
"Reset Print Server"
"Security" "Set Password"
"Authentication System"
"Kerberos Server"
"LDAP Server"
"LDAP Authentication"
"LDAP User Mapping"
"SSL/TLS"
"IPsec"
"802.1x"
*3
"IP Filter"
"SMTP Domain Filtering"
"Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings" "Copy Printer Settings"
"Copy Printer Settings Report"
"Print Volume" "Print Volume" "Print Volume"
"Dell ColorTrack"
"Address Book" "E-Mail Address" "E-Mail Address"
"E-Mail Group"
"Default Setup"
"Server Address" "Server Address"
"Phone Book" "FAX Speed Dial"
"FAX Group"
"Tray Management" "Tray Management"
Left Frame Tab Menu Item
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
145
*4
Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
*5
Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Printer Status
Use the Printer Status menu to check the status of consumables, hardware, and
specifications of the printer.
Printer Status
The Printer Status tab includes the Printer Status, Printer Events and Printer
Information pages.
Printer Status
Displays the status of the consumables, trays, and covers.
Printer Events
When faults occur, the details of all alerts or indications of faults are displayed in the
Printer Events page.
Cyan Toner
Cartridge
Indicates whether the toner, drum cartridge and/or
waste toner box is OK for use, or the toner, drum
cartridge and/or waste toner box needs to be
replaced soon or now.
Magenta Toner
Cartridge
Yellow Toner
Cartridge
Black Toner
Cartridge
Consumables
Cyan Drum
Cartridge
Magenta Drum
Cartridge
Yellow Drum
Cartridge
Black Drum
Cartridge
Waste Toner
Box
Paper Trays Status OK Indicates that there is some paper in the tray but the
quantity is unknown.
Add Paper Indicates that there is no paper in the tray.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Size Displays the size of paper in the tray.
Output Tray Status Indicates that the tray is available when OK is
displayed.
Capacity Displays the maximum capacity of the paper tray.
Cover Status Indicates whether the cover is closed or open.
Printer Type Color Laser is displayed normally.
Printing Speed
146
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Printer Information
Displays the printer details such as the hardware version and Service Tag Number. This
page can also be displayed by clicking Printer Information in the left frame.
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs menu contains information on the Job List and Completed Jobs
pages. These pages show the details of the status regarding each protocol or job.
Printer Jobs
The Printer Jobs tab includes the Job List and Completed Jobs pages.
Job List
Displays the jobs that are being processed. Click the Refresh button to update the
screen.
Completed Jobs
Displays the completed jobs. Up to the last 20 jobs are displayed. Click the Refresh
button to update the screen.
Printer Settings
Use the Printer Settings menu to display the Printer Settings Report, Printer Settings,
and Printer Maintenance tabs and to configure the printer settings.
Printer Settings Report
The Printer Settings Report tab includes the Menu Settings and Reports pages.
ID Displays the job ID.
Job Name Displays the file name of the job being processed.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Job Status
Job Type
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Clear Job History Deletes job history.
ID Displays the job ID.
Job Name Displays the file name of the completed job.
Owner Displays the name of the job owner.
Host Name Displays the name of the host computer.
Output Result Displays the status of the completed job.
Job Type
Impression Number Displays the total number of pages for the job.
No. of Sheets Displays the total number of sheets for the job.
Host I/F Displays the status of the host interface.
Job Submitted Time Displays the date when the job was submitted.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
147
Menu Settings
Displays the current settings of the printer menus.
Reports
Prints various types of reports and lists. Click Start to print each report.
*
This item is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings tab includes System Settings, Network Settings, USB Settings, PCL
Settings, PS Settings, PDF Settings, Secure Settings, Copy Defaults, Copy Color
Balance, Copy Settings, Fax Defaults, Fax Settings, Scan Defaults, Direct Print
Defaults/USB Direct Print Defaults, and MIFARE Customized Card pages.
System Settings
Configures the basic printer settings.
System Settings
Panel Settings
PCL Fonts List
PCL Macros List
PS Fonts List
PDF Fonts List
Job History
Error History
Print Meter
Color Test Page
Protocol Monitor
Speed Dial
Address Book
Server Address
Fax Activity
Fax Pending
Stored Documents
*
Power Saver Time - Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Sleep mode after it finishes
a job.
Power Saver Time - Deep Sleep Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Deep Sleep mode after it
has entered Sleep mode.
Power Saver Time - Power Off
Timer
*1
Sets the time taken by the printer to enter Power Off mode after it has
entered Deep Sleep mode.
mm / inch Sets the measurement unit to be used on the touch panel as either
mm or inches.
Screen Brightness Sets the brightness level of the touch panel.
Control Panel Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel
input is correct, or disables the tone.
Invalid Key Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the operator panel
input is incorrect, or disables the tone.
148
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Machine Ready Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer becomes
ready, or disables the tone.
Copy Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a copy job is
complete, or disables the tone.
Job Completed Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job other than a
copy job is complete, or disables the tone.
Fault Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a job ends
abnormally, or disables the tone.
Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when a problem occurs,
or disables the tone.
Out of Paper Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the printer runs out
of paper, or disables the tone.
Low Toner Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when the toner is low, or
disables the tone.
Auto Clear Alert Tone Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted 5 seconds before the
printer performs auto clear, or disables the tone.
NFC Authentication Tone
*1
Sets the volume of the tone that is emitted when an NFC card is
placed on the NFC reader for authentication, or disables the tone.
All Tones Sets the volume of all the alert tones, or disables all the tones.
Low Toner Alert Message Alerts you if the toner is low.
OffHook Wake Up Sets whether to wake up from Sleep or Deep Sleep mode when you
pick up the handset of the external telephone.
Auto Log Print Sets if a job history needs to be printed after every 20 jobs.
RAM Disk Sets whether to allocate RAM for the file system for the Secure Print,
Proof Print, Private Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print features.
Panel Language Used to set the language on the touch panel.
Max E-mail Size Sets the maximum size of e-mail that can be sent.
Auto Reset Sets the amount of time before the printer automatically resets its
settings to the defaults when no additional settings are made.
Fault Time-out Sets the amount of time the printer waits before canceling a job that
stops abnormally.
Default Paper Size Sets the default print paper size.
Print ID Sets where to print the user ID on the output paper.
Print Text Sets whether the printer outputs Page Description Language (PDL)
data which is not supported by the printer as text when the printer
receives it.
Banner Sheet Insert Position Sets where to insert a banner sheet in the output.
Banner Sheet Specify Tray Sets from which tray a banner sheet is fed.
Substitute Tray Sets whether to use another size paper when the paper that is loaded
in the specified tray does not match the paper size settings for the
current job.
Letterhead 2 Sided Sets whether to print on both sides of letterhead.
A4<>Letter Switch Sets whether to print A4 size jobs on Letter size paper if A4 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa.
A5<>Statement Switch Sets whether to print A5 size jobs on Statement size paper if A5 is not
available in the paper trays and vice versa.
Report 2 Sided Print Sets whether to print reports on both sides a sheet of paper.
Use Another Tray Sets whether to show a message to select another tray when the
specified paper is not available in the paper tray.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
149
*1
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
*2
This setting does not affect fax job.
Network Settings
Specifies the PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for the printer.
USB Settings
Specifies USB settings of the printer.
PCL Settings
Specifies the Printer Control Language (PCL) settings.
Resume Printing After Jam
Recovery
*2
Sets whether to delete print job after recovering from paper jam.
Tap To Print Sets whether to add the printer to a mobile device such as a tablet or
a notebook computer by tapping the device to the (NFC)
reader.
PS Data Format Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each
interface.
USB Port Sets whether to enable the USB interface on the printer.
PS Data Format Sets PostScript Level3 Compatible communication protocol for each
interface.
Job Time-out Sets the amount of time the printer waits for data to arrive from the
computer.
Paper Tray Sets the paper input tray.
Paper Size Sets the paper size.
Custom Paper Size - Y Sets the length of custom size paper.
Custom Paper Size - X Sets the width of custom size paper.
Orientation Sets how text and graphics are oriented on the page.
2 Sided Print Sets duplex setting as the default for all print jobs.
Font Sets the font from the list of registered fonts.
Symbol Set Sets a symbol set for the specified font.
Font Size Sets the font size for scalable typographic fonts.
Font Pitch Sets the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts.
Form Line Sets the number of lines in a page.
Quantity Sets the number of copies to print.
Image Enhance Sets whether to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Hex Dump Sets whether to help isolate the source of a print job problem. With
Hex Dump selected, all data sent to the printer is printed in
hexadecimal and character representation. Control codes are not
executed.
Draft Mode Sets whether to print in the draft mode.
Line Termination Sets how to handle line terminations.
Default Color Sets the print color mode as Color or Black. This setting is used for
print jobs without a specified color print mode.
Ignore Form Feed Sets whether to ignore blank pages that only contain Form Feed
control codes.
150
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
PS Settings
Specifies printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3 Compatible
emulation printer language.
PDF Settings
Specifies the PDF settings.
Secure Settings
Panel Lock
Sets a limited access to Admin Settings with a password, and to set or change the
password.
*
Some setting items in the Secure Settings are displayed only when this setting item is enabled.
NOTE:
•You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Functions Control
Specifies whether to lock the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print functions with a password, and
to set or change the password.
PS Error Report Sets whether the contents of the errors concerning PostScript Level3
Compatible page description language are printed.
PS Job Time-out Sets the execution time for one PostScript Level3 Compatible job.
Paper Select Mode Sets the way to select the tray for the PostScript Level3 Compatible
mode.
Default Color Sets the default color mode for the PostScript Level3 Compatible
mode.
Quantity
2 Sided Print Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Print Mode
PDF Password Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.
Collation Sets whether to sort the output.
Output Size
Layout
Default Color
Detect Job Separator Sets whether to detect the end of the job in printing PDF files
successively from the USB memory.
Panel Lock Control
*
Sets whether to enable/disable password protection for the Admin
Settings.
New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Admin Settings.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.
Copy Sets whether to lock the Copy function with a password.
Scan to E-mail Sets whether to lock the Scan to Email feature with a password.
Fax Sets whether to lock the Fax function with a password.
Fax Driver Sets whether to enable or disable the Fax Driver function.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
151
NOTE:
•You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Secure Receive
Allows you to password protect all the incoming faxes. When the Secure Receive feature
is enabled, the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password
is entered on the touch panel.
NOTE:
•You can set the password for the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool from Set Password in Print
Server Settings.
Desktop Login
Select the user authentication method from either local authentication or remote
authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP server or the
Kerberos server is required to authenticate the user.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Edit E-mail From Fields
Sets whether to enable editing of the transmission source when you use the Scan to
Email feature.
Reconfirm Recipients
Sets whether to reconfirm before sending fax or scan jobs.
Software Download
Sets whether to enable download of firmware updates.
Scan to Network Folder Sets whether to lock the Scan to Network Folder feature with a
password.
Scan to Computer Sets whether to lock the Scan to Computer feature with a password.
PC Scan Sets whether to lock the PC Scan feature with a password.
Scan to USB Sets whether to lock the Scan to USB feature with a password.
USB Direct Print Sets whether to lock the USB Direct Print feature with a password.
ID Copy Sets whether to enable or disable the ID Copy feature.
USB Service - Show When
Inserted
Sets whether to show the USB Drive Detected screen when a USB
flash drive is inserted into the printer.
Automatic Document Detected
Menu
Sets whether to enable or disable to detect document loaded in the
DADF and show DADF related menus on the touch panel.
New Password Sets a password that is required to access the Copy, Scan, Fax, and
Print functions.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.
Secure Receive Set Sets whether to enable/disable password protection for all incoming
faxes.
New Password Sets a password for incoming faxes.
Re-enter Password Confirms the set password.
Desktop Authentication Sets the authentication method.
Authentication System Click to display the Authentication System page and to specify the
authentication system settings.
User Login History Select the check box to enable the User Login History feature.
152
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Display of Network Information
Sets whether to show network information in the message field of the Home screen.
Login Error
Specifies how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to Panel Lock,
Functions Control, and Secure Receive.
NFC Authentication
Sets whether to enable the authentication using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Set Available Time - Copy/Scan/Fax/Print
Specifies the time to enable the secure setting for the Copy, Scan, Fax, and Print
functions.
Secure Job Expiration
NOTE:
•Secure Job Expiration feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Specifies the date and time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Copy Defaults
Creates your own default Copy settings.
Login Error Displays how many times an administrator can attempt to log in to
Panel Lock, Functions Control, and Secure Receive.
Set Available Time
Start Time
End Time
Recurrence
Expiration Mode Allows you to set the date to delete the files stored as Secure Print in
the RAM disk.
Expiration Time Sets the time to delete the files stored as Secure Print in the RAM disk.
Recurrence Sets the period to repeat the setting.
Weekly Settings Sets the day of the week to repeat the setting.
Monthly Settings Sets the day of the month to repeat the setting.
Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.
Select Tray Sets the default input tray.
Collation Sets whether to sort a copy job.
Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default reduction/enlargement ratio.
Custom Reduce/Enlarge Sets the custom reduction/enlargement ratio.
Original Size Sets the document paper size.
Original Type Sets the document paper type.
Darken/Lighten Sets the default copy density.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Color Saturation Adjusts the saturation of colors to make the colors lighter or darker.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background to enhance text on the
copy.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
153
Copy Color Balance
Specifies the copy color balance.
Copy Settings
Configures the Copy settings.
Fax Defaults
Creates your own default Fax settings.
Fax Settings
Configures the Fax settings.
NOTE:
•You cannot set up the items on the Fax Settings page unless you set up the country code under
Country.
Auto Exposure Level Sets the background suppression level.
2 Sided Copying Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Binding of
Original
Sets the binding position for the two-sided copying.
2-Up Off Does not perform multiple-up printing.
Auto Automatically reduces to fit onto one sheet of paper.
Manual Specify the reduce/enlarge ratio in Reduce/Enlarge.
Margin
Top/Bottom
Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin
Left/Right
Sets the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin.
Resolution Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters.
Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
Super Fine Suitable for documents containing extremely fine detail. The super
fine mode is enabled only if the remote machine also supports the
Super Fine resolution.
Photo Suitable for documents containing photographic images.
2 Sided
Scanning
Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Binding of
Original
Sets the binding position for the two-sided scanning.
Darken/Lighten Sets the default density to fax your documents lighter or darker.
Delayed Send Sets the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a specified
time.
Fax Number Allows you to enter the fax number of the printer to be printed on the
header of faxes.
Country Sets the country where the printer is used.
Fax Header
Name
Allows you to enter a name to be printed on the header of faxes.
Line Type Sets the default line type; Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
or Private Branch Exchange (PBX).
154
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Line Monitor Sets the volume of the line monitor, which audibly monitors a
transmission through the internal speaker until a connection is made.
DRPD Pattern Sets the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) setting from
Pattern1 to Pattern7.
DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies.
Receive Mode Telephone Automatic fax reception is turned off. You can receive a fax by picking
up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing a remote
receive code, or by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook and then
tapping Receive. For details about Manual Receive, see "Receiving
a Fax Manually."
Fax Automatically receives faxes.
Telephone/Fax When the printer receives an incoming fax, the external telephone
rings for the time specified in Auto Receive Tel/Fax, and then the
printer receives a fax. If an incoming call is not a fax, the printer beeps
from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call.
Ans
Machine/Fax
The printer can share a telephone line with an answering machine. In
this mode, the printer monitors the fax signal and pick up the line if
there are fax tones. If the telephone communication in your country
is serial, this mode is not supported.
DRPD Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) option, a
distinctive ring service must be installed on your telephone line by the
telephone company. After the telephone company has provided a
separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern, configure
the fax setup to monitor for that specific ring pattern.
Ring Tone
Volume
Sets the volume of the ring tone, which indicates that an incoming
call is a telephone call through the internal speaker when Receive
Mode is set to Telephone/Fax.
Auto Receive
Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after answering an incoming call.
Auto Receive
Tel/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external telephone receives an incoming call.
Auto Receive
Answer/Fax
Sets the interval at which the printer goes into the fax receive mode
after the external answering machine receives an incoming call.
Junk Fax Setup Sets whether to reject unwanted faxes by accepting only the faxes
from the numbers registered in the Phone Book.
2 Sided Printing Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Remote Receive Sets whether to receive a fax by pressing a remote receive code on
the external telephone.
Remote Receive
Tone
Sets a 2-digit remote receive code when Remote Receive is On.
Discard Size Sets whether to delete text or images at the bottom of a fax page
when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper. Selecting
Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the
output paper, and does not discard any images or text at the bottom
of the page.
Received Fax
Forward
Sets your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax number, to
e-mail addresses, or to a server.
Forwarding
Number
Allows you to enter the fax number of the destination to which
incoming faxes are forwarded.
Forwarding
E-mail Address 1
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which incoming faxes are to
be forwarded.
Forwarding
E-mail Address 2
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
155
Scan Defaults
Creates your own default Scan settings.
Forwarding
E-mail Address 3
Forwarding
E-mail Address 4
Forwarding
E-mail Address 5
Server Type Sets the server type.
Server Address Sets the server address registered under the server ID.
Server Port
Number
Sets the server port number.
Login Name Sets the login name.
Login Password Sets the login password.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to check it.
Share Name Sets the shared name.
Server Path Sets the server path.
Redial Attempts Sets the number of redial attempts to make if the destination fax
number is busy. If you enter 0, the printer does not redial.
Interval of
Redial
Sets the interval between redial attempts.
Resend Delay Sets the interval between re-send attempts.
Tone/Pulse Sets whether to use tone or pulse dialing.
Prefix Dial Sets whether to set a prefix dial number.
Prefix Dial
Number
Sets a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number dials before
any auto dial number is started. It is useful for accessing the Private
Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX).
Fax Cover Page Sets whether to attach a cover page to faxes.
Fax Header Sets whether to print the information of the sender on the header of
faxes.
ECM Sets whether to enable the Error Correction Mode (ECM). To use the
ECM, the remote machines must also support the ECM.
Modem Speed Allows you to adjust the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or
reception error occurs.
Display Manual
Fax Recipients
Sets whether to show the fax number of the recipient on the
Sending Fax screen when manually sending a fax.
Fax Activity Sets whether to automatically print a fax activity report after every 50
incoming and outgoing fax communications.
Fax Transmit Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
Fax Broadcast Sets whether to print a transmission report after every fax
transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs.
Fax Protocol Sets whether to print the protocol monitor report after every fax
transmission or only when an error occurs.
File Format Sets the file format in which scanned data is to be saved.
Output Color Sets whether to scan in color or in black and white.
Resolution Sets the default scan resolution.
156
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct Print Defaults
NOTE:
•For Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw, Direct Print Defaults is displayed. For Dell S2825cdn, USB
Direct Print Defaults is displayed.
Creates your own Direct Print Defaults / USB Direct Print Defaults setting.
MIFARE Customized Card
Registers SSFC formatted NFC ID cards.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Printer Maintenance
The Printer Maintenance tab includes the Paper Density, Adjust Transfer Belt Unit,
Adjust 2nd BTR, Adjust Fusing Unit, Color Registration Adjustments, Clean Developer,
Original Size Sets the document paper size.
2 Sided Scanning Sets whether to scan both sides of a document.
Binding of Original Sets the binding position for the two-sided scanning.
Darken/Lighten Sets the default scan density.
Sharpness Sets the default sharpness level.
Contrast Sets the default contrast level.
Auto Exposure Sets whether to suppress the background to enhance text on the
scanned data.
Auto Exposure Level Sets the default background suppression level.
Margin Top/Bottom Sets the value of the top and bottom margins.
Margin Left/Right Sets the value of the left and right margins.
Margin Middle Sets the value of the middle margin.
TIFF File Format Sets the TIFF file format to TIFF V6 or TTN2.
Image Compression Sets the image compression level.
File Naming Mode Sets the detailed settings of File Naming Mode to Auto, Add Prefix or
Add Suffix.
Prefix/Suffix String Sets the texts that are added when Add Prefix or Add Suffix are
selected.
Create Folder Sets whether to create a folder when saving scanned data.
Output Color Sets whether to print in color or in black and white.
Select Tray Sets the default input tray.
2 Sided Printing Sets whether to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
Layout Sets Displays the default paper layout when Layout is selected.
Image Types Sets the print image quality when printing documents.
Collation Sets whether to sort the output.
PDF Password Sets a password.
Re-enter PDF Password Confirms the set password.
User ID Block 1 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
User ID Block 2 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
User ID Block 3 Allows you to register the MIFARE Customized Card.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
157
Reset Defaults, Initialize Print Meter, Clear Stored Jobs, Non-Dell Toner, Adjust
Altitude, Decrease Ghosting, Clock Settings, and Web Link Customization pages.
Paper Density
Specifies the paper density for the plain paper and labels.
Adjust Transfer Belt Unit
Adjusts the transfer bias when the faint image of the previous page, a part of the page
currently printing, etc. appear on the output.
Adjust 2nd BTR
Specifies the optimum voltage settings for printing for the 2nd Belt Transfer Roller (2nd
BTR). To lower the voltage, set negative values. To increase, set positive values. If you see
mottles on the print output, try to increase the voltage. If you see white spots on the
print output, try to decrease the voltage.
NOTE:
•The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
Adjust Fusing Unit
Specifies the optimum temperature settings for printing for the fusing unit. To lower the
temperature, set negative values. To increase, set positive values. When the printouts are
curled, try to lower the temperature. When the toner does not fuse on the paper
properly, try to increase the temperature.
NOTE:
•The print quality changes depending on the setting values you select for this item.
K Offset If faint black colored ghosts appear, try to decrease the value.
YMC Offset If faint ghosts in color (yellow, magenta, or cyan) appear, try to
decrease the value.
Plain(60-90g/m
2
)Sets the reference voltage setting for the transfer roller for each paper
type.
Plain Thick(91-105g/m
2
)
Covers(106-176g/m
2
)
Covers Thick(177-220g/m
2
)
Coated(106-176g/m
2
)
Coated Thick(177-220g/m
2
)
Label
Envelope
Recycled
Plain(60-90g/m
2
)Sets the temperature settings for the fusing unit for each paper type.
Plain Thick(91-105g/m
2
)
Covers(106-176g/m
2
)
Covers Thick(177-220g/m
2
)
Coated(106-176g/m
2
)
Coated Thick(177-220g/m
2
)
Label
Envelope
158
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Color Registration Adjustments
Specifies whether to automatically perform color registration adjustment.
Clean Developer
Stirs the developer in the drum cartridge.
Reset Defaults
Initializes the non-volatile (NV) memory. After executing this setting and restarting the
printer, all the menu parameters are reset to their default values.
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Initialize Print Meter
Initializes the print meter of the printer. When the print meter is initialized, the meter
count is reset to 0.
Clear Stored Jobs
NOTE:
•Clear Stored Jobs feature is available only when RAM Disk is enabled.
Clears all files stored in the RAM disk.
Recycled
Clean Developer Click Start to stir the developer in the drum cartridge.
Toner Refresh Expels the toner in the drum cartridge, and supplies the fresh toner
from the toner cartridge.
Reset Defaults
User Fax Section
and restart
printer.
Click Start to reset the fax number entries in the Address Book.
Reset Defaults
User Scan
Section and
restart printer.
Click Start to reset the e-mail and server address entries in the
Address Book.
Reset Defaults
User Account
Section and
restart printer.
*
Click Start to reset the user account entries.
Reset Defaults
User App
Section and
restart printer.
*
Click Start to reset the user application entries.
Reset Defaults
System Section
and restart
printer.
Click Start to reset the system parameters.
Power On
Wizard
Click Start to perform the initial setup for the printer.
All Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
159
Non-Dell Toner
Uses toner cartridge of another manufacturer.
CAUTION:
• Using a non-Dell toner cartridge may severely damage the printer. The warranty does not cover
damages caused by using non-Dell toner cartridges.
Adjust Altitude
Specifies the altitude of the location where the printer is installed.
The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric
pressure. Adjustments are performed by specifying the altitude of the location where the
printer is being used.
Decrease Ghosting
Reduces negative ghost.
Clock Settings
Specifies the clock settings.
Web Link Customization
Specifies a link used for ordering consumables, which can be accessed from Order
Supplies at: in the left frame.
Print Server Settings
Use the Print Server Settings menu to set the type of printer interface and the necessary
conditions for communication.
Print Server Reports
The Print Server Reports tab includes the Print Server Setup Page and the E-Mail Server
Setup Page.
Print Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of the print server.
Secure Document Click Start to clear all files stored as Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mail Box Print, and Public Mail Box Print in the RAM disk.
Stored Document Click Start to clear all files stored in the RAM disk.
Date Format
Time Format
Time Zone
Set Date
Set Time
Select Reorder URL Sets a URL to be linked to Order Supplies at:
Regular Displays the regular URL (http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna) that
can be linked to Order Supplies at:.
Premier Displays the premier URL (http://premier.dell.com) that can be linked
to Order Supplies at:.
160
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
E-Mail Server Setup Page
Displays the current settings of the e-mail server.
Print Server Settings
The Print Server Settings tab includes the Basic Information, Port Settings, TCP/IP,
SMB, E-Mail Server, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMP, Scan to Network Folder, SNTP, AirPrint,
Mopria, Google Cloud Print, Dell Document Hub, Proxy Server, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, and
Reset Print Server pages.
Basic Information
Configures basic information of the printer.
NOTE:
•The Auto Refresh feature is effective for the contents of the top frame, Printer Status page, Job
List page, and Completed Jobs page.
Port Settings
Enables or disables printing ports and management protocol features.
System Settings Printer Name
Location Sets the location of the printer.
Contact Person Sets the contact name, number, and other information of the printer
administrator and service center.
Administrator
E-Mail Address
Sets the contact address of the printer administrator and service
center.
Asset Tag
Number
Dell Printer
Configuration
Web Tool
Settings
Auto Refresh Automatically refreshes the contents of the status display pages.
Auto Refresh
Interval
Sets the time interval for refreshing the contents of the status display
pages automatically.
Ethernet
*1
Ethernet
Settings
Auto Detects the Ethernet transmission rate and the
duplex mode.
10Base-T
Half-Duplex
Specifies as the default value.
10Base-T
Full-Duplex
100Base-TX
Half-Duplex
100Base-TX
Full-Duplex
1000Base-T
Full-Duplex
Current
Ethernet
Settings
MAC Address
Energy Efficient
Ethernet
Select the check box to enable the Energy Efficient
Ethernet feature.
Port Status LPD Sets whether to enable each item.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
161
*1
This item is available only when the printer is connected using an Ethernet cable.
*2
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
NOTE:
•The settings in the Port Settings page become valid only when the printer is restarted. When you
change or configure the settings, click the Apply New Settings button to apply the new settings.
TCP/IP
Configures the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address of the printer.
Port9100
IPP
WSD Print
WSD Scan
Network
TWAIN
FTP
SMB
Bonjour
(mDNS)
E-Mail Alert
Telnet
SNMP
Update Address
Book
SNTP
Google Cloud
Print
Print from Dell
Document
Hub
*2
Scan to Dell
Document
Hub
*2
TCP/IP Settings IP Mode
Host Name
IPv4 IP Address
Mode
Sets the method for acquiring the IP address.
Manual IP
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the IP is
allocated to the printer using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot
be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
Manual Subnet
Mask
When an IP address is being set manually, the
subnet mask is specified using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 255.
255.255.255.255 cannot be specified as the subnet
mask.
162
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Manual
Gateway
Address
When an IP address is being set manually, the
gateway address is specified using the format
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn. Each octet that makes up
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn is a value in the range of 0 to 254.
127 and any value in the range of 224 to 254 cannot
be specified for the first octet of a gateway address.
IPv6 Enable Stateless
Address
Select the check box to enable the stateless
address.
Use Manual
Address
Select the check box to set the IP address manually.
Get IP Address
from DHCP
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the IP address via DHCP.
Manual Address Sets the IP address. To specify an IPv6 address, enter
the address followed by a slash (/) and then "64." For
details, contact your system administrator.
Manual
Gateway
Address
Sets the gateway address.
DNS DNS Domain
Name
IPv4 Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCP
Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the DNS server address via DHCP.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Manually sets the DNS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when Get DNS Server
Address from DHCP is not selected.
IPv6 Get DNS Server
Address from
DHCPv6-lite
Select the check box to get the DNS server address
automatically from the DHCPv6-lite server.
Manual DNS
Server Address
Sets the DNS server address.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv4)
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to
DNS.
DNS Dynamic
Update (IPv6)
Select the check box to enable dynamic updates to
DNS.
Auto Generate
Search List
Select the check box to automatically generate the
search list.
Search Domain
Name
Sets the search domain name. Up to 255
alphanumeric characters, periods, and hyphens can
be used. If you need to specify more than one
domain name, separate them using a comma or
semicolon.
Time-out Sets the time-out period.
Priority to IPv6
DNS Name
Resolution
Select the check box to enable the DNS Name
Resolution feature.
WINS WINS Mode Allows you to enable or disable the automatic
setting of the primary and secondary WINS server
addresses via DHCP.
WINS Primary
Server
Manually sets the primary WINS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not
selected.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
163
To configure the IP Filter feature, enter an IP address to be filtered in the Address text
box and the subnet mask in the Address Mask text box. Enter a numeric value between 0
and 255 in each text box. "*" is appended to the current value.
WINS
Secondary
Server
Manually sets the secondary WINS server address in
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format when WINS Mode is not
selected.
LPD Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Port9100 Port Number Sets the port number from 9000 to 9999.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
IPP Printer URI Displays the printer URI.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Port Number Displays the port number for receiving requests
from the client.
Maximum
Sessions
Displays the maximum number of connections
received simultaneously by the client.
WSD Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Receive
Time-Out
Sets the receive time-out period.
Notification
Time-Out
Sets the notification time-out period.
Maximum
Number of TTL
Sets the maximum number of TTL from 1 to 10.
Maximum
Number of
Notification
Sets the maximum number of notifications from 10
to 20.
Network TWAIN Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
FTP Password Sets the password for FTP.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again to check it.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
HTTP Port Number Sets the port number to 80 or from 8000 to 9999.
Simultaneous
Connections
Displays the maximum number of simultaneous
connections.
CSRF
Protection
Select the check box to enable the CSRF Protection.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Telnet Password Sets the password for Telnet.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Update Address
Book
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
164
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
IP Filter Setup Procedure
You can set up to a maximum of five items and the first item set takes priority. When
setting multiple filters, enter the shortest address first followed by a slightly longer
address, a longer address and so on.
Enabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to enable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3Select Accept.
4Click Apply New Settings.
Disabling Printing From a Specified User
The following describes the procedure to disable printing only from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3Select Reject.
4Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5Enter "0.0.0.0" in the Address text box and "0.0.0.0" in the Address Mask text
box.
6Select Accept.
7Click Apply New Settings.
Enabling and Disabling Printing from Network Addresses
You can enable printing from the "192.168" network address and disable printing from
the "192.0.2" network address.
The following example describes how to enable printing from the "192.0.2.1" IP
address.
1Click the first column of the Access List row 1.
2Enter "192.0.2.1" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.255" in the Address
Mask text box.
3Select Accept.
4Click the first column of the Access List row 2.
5Enter "192.0.2.0" in the Address text box and "255.255.255.0" in the Address
Mask text box.
6Select Reject.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
165
7Click the first column of the Access List row 3.
8Enter "192.0.0.0" in the Address text box and "255.255.0.0" in the Address Mask
text box.
9Select Accept.
10 Click Apply New Settings.
SMB
Specifies the setting of the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol.
E-Mail Server
Configures detailed settings of E-Mail Server, E-Mail Alert and E-Mail Report. This page
can also be displayed by clicking E-Mail Server Settings Overview in the left frame.
Host Name Sets the host name of the server computer.
Workgroup Sets the workgroup.
Maximum Sessions Sets the maximum number of sessions.
Unicode Support Sets whether to notify the host name and workgroup name in
Unicode characters during SMB transmission.
Auto Master Mode Sets whether to enable the Auto Master Mode.
Encrypt Password Sets whether to encrypt the password.
Job Time-Out Sets the job time-out period.
Connection Time-Out Sets the connection time-out period.
E-Mail Server
Settings
Primary SMTP
Gateway
Sets the primary SMTP gateway.
SMTP Port
Number
Sets the SMTP port number. This must be 25, 587 or
between 5000 and 65535.
E-Mail Send
Authentication
Sets the authentication method for outgoing e-mail.
SMTP Login
User
Sets the SMTP login user. Up to 63 alphanumeric
characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than
one address, separate them using commas.
SMTP Login
Password
Sets the SMTP account password using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter SMTP
Login Password
Confirms the set SMTP account password.
POP3 Server
Address
*
Sets the POP3 server address in IP address format of
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd or as a DNS host name using up to
63 characters.
POP3 Port
Number
*
Sets the POP3 server port number. This must be 110
or between 5000 and 65535.
POP User
Name
*
Sets the POP3 account user name. Up to 63
alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens,
underscores, and at symbols (@) can be used. If
specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
POP User
Password
*
Sets the POP3 account password using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
166
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*
This item is available only when POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) for E-Mail Send
Authentication is selected.
Bonjour (mDNS)
Configures the detailed settings of Bonjour.
Re-enter POP
User Password
*
Confirms the set password.
Reply Address Designates the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-mail Alert.
SMTP Server
Connection
Displays the status of the SMTP server connection.
E-Mail Alert
Settings
E-Mail List 1 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for
List 1
Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
paper handling.
Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Service Calls.
E-Mail List 2 Sets acceptable e-mail addresses for the E-Mail
Alert feature using up to 255 alphanumeric
characters.
Select Alerts for
List 2
Supplies Alerts Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
consumables.
Paper Handling
Alerts
Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
paper handling.
Service Call Select the check box to receive an E-Mail Alert for
Service Calls.
E-Mail Report
Settings
History Report Sets whether to receive the job history report by
e-mail after every 20 print, copy, scan, and fax jobs.
Statistics
Report
Sets whether to receive the statistic report by e-mail
on the use of print, copy, scan, and fax.
Volume Report Sets whether to receive the print volume report by
e-mail.
Transmission
Time
Sets what time the reports are sent.
Recurrence Sets at what recurrence the reports are sent.
Weekly Settings
(for Weekly
only)
Sets the day of the week the reports are sent.
Monthly
Settings (for
Monthly only)
Sets the day of the month the reports are sent.
Destination
E-Mail Address
1
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.
Destination
E-Mail Address
2
Allows you to enter the e-mail address to which the
reports are sent to.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
167
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
SNMP
Configures the detailed settings of SNMP.
LAN1
*
Host Name Sets the host name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and "-"
(hyphen). The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Printer Name Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Wide-Area
Bonjour
Select the check box to enable the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol.
LAN2
*
Host Name Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
Printer Name Sets the printer name up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbol
sets. The original setting remains valid if no input is made.
SNMP
Configuration
*1
Enable SNMP
v1/v2c Protocol
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v1/v2c protocol.
Edit SNMP
v1/v2c
Properties
Click to display the SNMP v1/v2c page and to edit the setting of
SNMP v1/v2c protocol from the page.
Enable SNMP v3
Protocol
Select the check box to enable the SNMP v3 protocol.
Edit SNMP v3
Properties
Click to display the SNMP v3 page and to edit the setting of SNMP v3
protocol from the page.
You can click this item only when SSL communication is enabled.
Community
Name
Community
Name (Read
only)
*2
Sets the community name to access (read only) data using up to 31
alphanumeric characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Read Community is public.
Re-enter
Community
Name (Read
only)
*2
Enters the community name to access (read only) data again to check
it.
Community
Name
(Read/Write)
*2
Sets the community name to access (read and write) data using up to
31 alphanumeric characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for community name in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Read/Write Community is
private.
Re-enter
Community
Name
(Read/Write)
*2
Enters the community name to access (read and write) data again to
check it.
Community
Name (Trap)
*2
Sets the community name used for trap up to 31 alphanumeric
characters.
The original setting remains valid if no input is made. Characters
entered for Community Name (Trap) in the previous settings are not
displayed on the screen. The default Trap Community is " " (NULL).
Re-enter
Community
Name (Trap)
*2
Enters the community name used for trap again to check it.
168
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
*2
The default value can be changed by using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
*3
This item is available only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.
The Wi-Fi Direct feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
SNMP v3
*
Edits the detailed settings of SNMP v3 protocol.
To enter this page, click Edit SNMP v3 Properties in the SNMP page.
*
This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Scan to Network Folder
Specifies the client when scanning data.
Trap
Notification 1-4
Trap Address
Type
Select the check boxes to notify trap occurrence. In this case, specify
the IP address and IP socket in the following format:
Trap Address IPv4
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn:mmmmm format. Each section of nnn is a variable
value between 0 and 255. Note that values 127 and 224-254 are not
valid for the first three-digits only. IP socket mmmmm is a variable
value between 0 and 65,535.
IPv6
Specify the IP address and IP socket in the
xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:mmmmm format. Each
section of XXXX is a hexadecimal variable value between 0 and ffff. IP
socket mmmmm is a variable value between 0 and 65,535.
Port Number
Notify
Network
*3
Authenticate
Error Trap
Select the check box to notify Authenticate Error Trap.
Administrator
Account
Account
Enabled
Select the check box to enable the administrator account.
User Name Enters the user name of the administrator account.
Authentication
Password
Sets the authentication password of the administrator account using
8 to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Authentication
Password
Confirms the set password.
Privacy
Password
Sets the privacy password of the administrator account using 8 to 32
alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Privacy
Password
Confirms the set password.
Print Drivers /
Remote Client
Account
Account
Enabled
Select the check box to enable the print drivers and remote client
account.
Reset to default
Password
Click to reset the password for the print drivers and remote client
account to default.
FTP Client Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
FTP Passive Sets whether to enable the FTP Passive mode.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
169
SNTP
Configures the SNTP server settings in order to perform time synchronization through
SNTP.
AirPrint
Configures the detailed setting of AirPrint.
*
This item is displayed only when Wi-Fi Direct is set to Enable.
SMB Client Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
SMB Protocol Sets the SMB protocol.
SNTP IP Address /
Host Name
Sets the IP address or the host name of the SNTP server.
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the connection time-out period.
Time
Synchronization
Interval
Sets the interval for performing time synchronization using SNTP.
Last
Connection
Time
Displays the last date and time when the printer was connected to the
SNTP server.
Connection
Status
Displays the status of the connections between the SNTP server and
the printer.
AirPrint Enable AirPrint Select the check box to enable the printer for AirPrint.
Enable USB Select the check box to enable IPP over USB. When you disable
Enable AirPrint, this setting will be disabled automatically.
Bonjour Name Enter the name that is to be displayed as an AirPrint printer.
Location Enter the location of the printer.
Geo-Location Enter the physical location of the printer.
IPP
Authentication
Basic
Authentication
Select the check box to enable the basic authentication scheme.
User Name Enter the user name.
Password Enter the user password.
Re-enter
Password
Re-enter the user password for confirmation.
Scan Connection
Time-Out
Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.
SSL/TLS
*
SSL/TLS Click Settings to display the SSL/TLS page.
Supply Levels Cyan Toner
Cartridge
Displays the toner level.
Magenta Toner
Cartridge
Yellow Toner
Cartridge
Black Toner
Cartridge
170
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Mopria
Enable to use Mopria Print Service.
NOTE:
•The Enable button is disabled, when both Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP are enabled.
Google Cloud Print
Registers the printer to Google Cloud Print.
*
Google Cloud Print can only be used when the printer is using IPv4.
Dell Document Hub
Configures the connections to the Dell Document Hub Server.
NOTE:
•Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Proxy Server
Configures the Proxy Server settings.
Wi-Fi
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi feature is available only when the printer is connected using the wireless network.
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Configures the detailed setting for the wireless network.
To use the wireless network, make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable.
NOTE:
•Once Wi-Fi is activated, wired LAN protocol is disabled.
Google Cloud
Print
*
(Registration
state)
Displays the Google Cloud Print registration state.
Register This
Device to
Google Cloud
Print
Click to register the printer to Google Cloud Print.
Dell Document
Hub
Connection
Time-Out
Sets the time duration until the connection becomes time-out.
Polling Interval Sets the interval time for polling.
Proxy Server Use Proxy
Server
Sets whether to enable the use of a proxy server.
Address to
Bypass Proxy
Server
Sets the address to bypass proxy server.
Server Name Sets the name of the proxy server.
Port Number Sets the port number from 1 to 65535.
Authentication Sets whether to enable authentication.
Login Name Sets the login name for the proxy server.
Password Sets the login password for the proxy server.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
171
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi connection.
SSID Sets the name that identifies the wireless network.
Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Network Type Sets the network type from either Ad-Hoc or
Infrastructure.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the printer.
Link Channel Displays the channel number of the wireless
connection for the printer.
Link Quality Displays the quality of the wireless network
connection for the printer.
Security
Settings
Encryption Select the encryption type from the list.
No Security Sets No Security to configure the wireless setting
without specifying an encryption type from WEP,
WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise.
WEP Sets the WEP to use through the wireless network.
WPA-PSK
AES/WPA2-PSK
AES
*1, 2
Sets the WPA-PSK AES/WPA2-PSK AES to use
through the wireless network.
WPA-Enterprise
-AES/WPA2-
Enterprise-AES
*
2, 3
Sets the WPA-Enterprise AES/WPA2-Enterprise AES
to use through the wireless network.
Mixed Mode
PSK
*1, 2
Sets the Mixed Mode PSK to use through the
wireless network. Mixed Mode PSK automatically
selects the encryption type from either WPA-PSK
AES or WPA2-PSK AES.
Mixed Mode
Enterprise
*2, 3
Sets the Mixed Mode Enterprise to use through the
wireless network. Mixed Mode Enterprise
automatically selects the encryption type from
either WPA-Enterprise AES or WPA2-Enterprise AES.
WEP Encryption Select the WEP key code from either Hex or Ascii.
WEP Key 1 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 1
Enters the WEP key 1 again to check it.
WEP Key 2 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 2
Enters the WEP key 2 again to check it.
WEP Key 3 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 3
Enters the WEP key 3 again to check it.
WEP Key 4 Sets the WEP key set used through the wireless
network only when WEP 128bit or WEP 64bit is
selected for Encryption.
Re-enter WEP
Key 4
Enters the WEP key 4 again to check it.
172
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1
For encryption, AES method is used.
*2
This item is available only when Infrastructure is selected for Network Type.
*3
For authentication and encryption by digital certificate, AES method is used.
*4
To activate the setting, import a certificate which supports wireless LAN (server/client) on the SSL/TLS pages,
and enable the relevant certificate in advance.
*5
When Auto is selected for Transmit Key, the key set specified for WEP Key 1 is used.
Wi-Fi Direct
Configures the detailed setting of the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Reset Print Server
Initializes NVRAM (non-volatile RAM) for the network feature and restarts the printer. You
can also initialize NVRAM of the printer from Reset Defaults in the Printer Settings
menu.
Transmit Key
*5
Sets the transmit key type from the list.
WPA-PSK Passphrase Sets the passphrase.
Re-enter
Passphrase/Key
Enters the passphrase again to check it.
WPA-Enterprise
*4
EAP-Identity Sets the EAP-Identity for the authentication.
Authentication
Method
Shows the authentication method.
Login Name Sets the login name for the authentication.
Password Sets the password.
Re-enter
Password
Enters the password again to check it.
Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi Direct Sets whether to enable the Wi-Fi Direct connection.
Group Role Sets the group role of the printer.
Device Name Specifies the printer name that identifies the Wi-Fi Direct network
with up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Check it when selecting the
printer name on your mobile device.
WPS Setup Configures the Wi-Fi Direct network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup
(WPS).
Group Owner SSID (Character
string following
"DIRECT-**")
Specifies a name to identify the Wi-Fi Direct network. Up to 32
alphanumeric characters can be entered. "DIRECT-" cannot be
changed.
Passphrase Displays the passphrase. Check it when entering the passphrase into
your mobile device.
IP Address Displays the IP address of the Wi-Fi Direct adapter.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Status Paired Device Displays the mobile name currently connected.
Current Role Displays the current group role of the printer.
Current SSID Displays the current SSID. Check it selecting the Wi-Fi Direct network
name on your mobile device.
Initialize NIC NVRAM Memory
and restart printer.
Click Start to initialize NVRAM, revert network settings to the factory
default settings, and restart the network capability.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
173
Security
The Security tab includes Set Password, Authentication System, Kerberos Server, LDAP
Server, LDAP Authentication, LDAP User Mapping, SSL/TLS, IPsec, 802.1x, IP Filter, and
SMTP Domain Filtering pages.
Set Password
Specifies the password that is required to access the setup parameters of the printer
from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. This page can also be displayed by
clicking Set Password in the left frame.
NOTE:
•To restore the password to the default (NULL), initialize the non-volatile memory (NVM).
•You can set the password for access to Admin Settings.
Authentication System
Specifies the server authentication type, the server response time-out, or the search
time-out.
*
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Kerberos Server
Specifies the settings for the Kerberos server.
*
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
Restart Printer Click Start to restart the printer.
Administrator Password Sets the password using up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter Administrator Password Confirms the set password.
Access denial by the
authentication failure of the
Administrator
Sets the amount of time the administrator should wait for the access
to the printer setup from Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. The
access is denied if the time-out time is exceeded. If you set 0, this
mode is disabled.
Authentication
Type
Authentication
System Settings
Select the authentication system from the list.
Authentication
Type (for
ColorTrack
PRO)
*
Authentication
System Settings
Select the authentication system from the list. When the server you
are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos
(Windows) as the authentication method and specify the server
settings in "Kerberos Server."
Optional
Information
Server
Response
Time-Out
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for response from the
server.
Search
Time-Out
Sets the amount of time the printer should wait for searching for the
server.
Kerberos Server IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.
Domain Name Specifies each information.
Kerberos Server
(for ColorTrack
PRO)
*
IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Sets the IP address or host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 88 or between 5000 and 65535.
Domain Name Enter the domain name.
174
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
LDAP Server
Specifies the settings of the LDAP server.
*
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
NOTE:
• Server Address Book must be set to On before you can use the server address book for the Scan to
Email feature.
• Server Phone Book must be set to On before you can use the server phone book for the Fax
function.
LDAP Authentication
Specifies the LDAP server authentication method.
Server
Information
IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 389, 3268, or between 5000 and 65535.
LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Optional
Information
Search
Directory Root
Enters the search directory root.
Login
Credentials to
Access LDAP
Server
Select credential used to access the LDAP server.
Login Name Enters the login name.
Password Enters the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters. If
the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
Re-enter
Password
Enters the login password again to check it.
Search
Time-Out
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the
LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time.
Search Name
Order
Sets the search order.
Server Address
Book
Select the check box to enable the server address book.
Server Phone
Book
Select the check box to enable the server phone book.
Server
Information (for
ColorTrack
PRO)
*
IP Address /
Host Name &
Port
Sets IP address or the host name, and the port address. The port
address must be 389, 636, 3268, 3269, or between 5000 and 65535.
When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636,
and when you use the global catalog, set the port number to 3269.
LDAP Server Displays the current software information of the LDAP server.
Optional
Information (for
ColorTrack
PRO)
*
Search
Directory Root
Enter the search directory root.
Login Name Enter the login name.
Password Enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the login password again to confirm it.
Search
Time-Out
Select Wait LDAP Server Limit to follow the time specified by the
LDAP server. Select Wait to specify the time.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
175
*
This is available on Dell S2825cdn.
LDAP User Mapping
Specifies the settings of the LDAP user mapping.
SSL/TLS
Specifies the settings for the SSL encryption communication to the printer, and
set/delete the certificate used for IPsec, LDAPS, or Wi-Fi.
NOTE:
•Wireless network is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
LDAP
Authentication
Authentication
Method
Shows the authentication method.
Use Added Text
String
Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
Text String
Added to User
Name
Enter the added text string.
LDAP
Authentication
(for ColorTrack
PRO)
*
Specifies the LDAP server authentication method.
Authentication
Method
Shows the authentication method.
Use Added Text
String
Select whether to use the added text string from the list.
Text String
Added to User
Name
Enter the added text string.
Common Name Sets the attribute type of the common name set for the LDAP server.
Surname Sets the attribute type of the surname set for the LDAP server.
Given Name Sets the attribute type of the given name set for the LDAP server.
E-mail Address Sets the attribute type of the e-mail address set for the LDAP server.
Fax Phone Sets the attribute type of the fax phone number set for the LDAP
server.
SSL/TLS HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication
*1
Select the check box to enable the HTTP-SSL/TLS Communication.
HTTP - SSL/TLS
Communication
Port Number
Sets the port number, which is not identical with that of HTTP for
SSL/TLS. This must be 443 or between 8000 and 9999.
LDAP - SSL/TLS
Communication
*1
Select the check box to enable the LDAP, and access is established
using SSL/TLS communication.
SMTP - SSL/TLS
Communication
Sets the type of SSL/TLS used to communicate with the SMTP server.
MD5 Select the check box to enable the MD5.
Generate
Self-Signed
Certificate
*2
Click to display the Generate Self-Signed Certificate page and to
create a security certification from the page. The Generate
Self-Signed Certificate button is available only when the self-signed
certificate is not generated.
176
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Public Key
Method
Select the public key method of the self-signed certificate.
Size of Public
Key
Select the size of public key.
Issuer Sets the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
Validity Enters the valid days from 1 to 9999 days.
Generate Signed
Certificate
Click to generate the SSL self-signed certificate.
Certificate
Signing
Request (CSR)
Click to display the Certificate Signing Request (CSR) page and to
create a certificate signing request from the page.
Digital Signature
Algorithm
Select the digital signature algorithm.
Public Key Size Select the public key size.
2 Letter Country
Code (Required)
Enter the 2-letter country code.
State / Province
Name
Enter the state or province name up to 16 bytes.
Locality Name Enter the locality name up to 32 bytes.
Organization
Name
(Required)
Enter the organization name up to 32 bytes.
Organization
Unit (Required)
Enter the organization unit up to 32 bytes.
Common Name Enter the common name.
E-mail Address Enter the e-mail address.
Upload Signed
Certificate
*2
Click to display the Upload Signed Certificate page and to upload the
certificate file to the device from the page.
Password Enter the password to upload the certificate file.
Re-enter
Password
Enter the password again for confirmation.
File Name Click Browse to browse the file name to upload to the device.
Import Click Import to upload the certificate file to the device.
Certificate
Management
*2
Click to display the Certificate Management page and to manage a
security certification from the page.
Category Select the device to certificate.
Certificate
Purpose
Select the connection to certificate.
Certificate
Order
Select the order to certificate.
Display the List Click to display the Certificate List page.
Delete All
Certificates
Delete Click to delete all the certificates.
Certificate List
*2
Category Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page.
Certificate
Purpose
Displays the connection to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page.
Issued To Displays the list of certificate order.
Validity Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
177
*1
This item is available only when the self-signed certificate has been generated.
*2
This item is effective only when connected via SSL/TLS (https). Only the administrator is allowed to display the
pages.
IPsec
Specifies the Security Architecture settings for Internet Protocol (IPsec) for encrypted
communication to the printer.
Certificate
Details
Click to display the Certificate Details page. The SSL/TLS page is
displayed when no item in the Issued To column is selected.
Certificate
Details
*2
Category Displays the device to certificate selected at the Certificate
Management page or SSL/TLS page.
Issued To Displays the device to certificate.
Issuer Displays the issuer to certificate.
Serial Number Displays the serial number of the device.
Public Key
Method
Displays the public key method.
Size of Public
Key
Displays the size of public key.
Valid From Displays the time the certificate is valid.
Valid Until Displays the time the certificate is invalid.
Status Displays whether certificate is valid or not.
Certificate
Purpose
Displays the purpose of certificate.
Certificate
Selection Status
Displays the type of device certificate you selected.
E-mail Address Displayed only when an e-mail address is specified in the certificate.
Use this
certificate
Click to apply this certificate to the device.
Delete Click to delete this certificate.
Export This
Certificate
Click to export the certificate to the other device.
Certificate
Signing
Request (CSR)
Details
2 Letter Country
Code (Required)
Displays the details of the Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
State / Province
Name
Locality Name
Organization
Name
(Required)
Organization
Unit (Required)
Common Name
E-mail Address
IPsec Settings Protocol Select the check box to enable the protocol.
IKE Pre-Shared Key is displayed for IKE.
Pre-Shared Key Sets a shared key. Up to 255 alphanumeric characters, periods, and
hyphens can be used.
178
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
NOTE:
•If IPsec is enabled with incorrect settings, you must disable it using the IPsec menu on the
operator panel.
802.1x
Specifies the settings for IEEE 802.1x authentication for encrypted communication to the
printer.
NOTE:
•This is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
IP Filter
Specifies whether to enable IP filter feature, which allows to make settings of the IP filter
feature used for LPD and Port9100.
Re-enter
Pre-Shared Key
Enters the shared key again to check it.
IKE SA Lifetime Sets the lifetime for IKE SA from 5 to 28,800 minutes.
IPsec SA
Lifetime
Sets the lifetime for IPsec SA from 5 to 2,880 minutes.
DH Group Sets the DH group.
PFS Select the check box to enable the PFS setting.
Remote peers
IPv4 address
Sets the IP address to connect to.
Remote peers
IPv6 address
Sets the IP address to connect to.
Non IPsec
communication
policy
Allows communication with a device which does not support IPsec.
Configure
802.1x
Enable IEEE
802.1x
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1x
authentication.
Authentication
Method
EAP-MD5 Selects the authentication method to use for IEEE
802.1x authentication.
EAP-MS-CHAPv
2
PEAP/MS-CHAP
v2
Login Name:
(Device Name)
Sets the login name (device name) for IEEE 802.1x
authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric
characters.
Password Sets the login password for IEEE 802.1x
authentication using up to 128 alphanumeric
characters.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set login password.
IPv4 Filter Enables or disables IPv4 Filter.
IP Filter Rule List Add, edit, or delete IP filter rule. Up to 20 rules can be registered.
IPv6 Filter Enables or disables IPv6 Filter.
IP Filter Rule List Add, edit, or delete IP filter rule. Up to 20 rules can be registered.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
179
SMTP Domain Filtering
Specifies whether to limit e-mail destination domains.
NOTE:
•This feature does not restrict sending e-mails through the E-Mail Alert feature.
Copy Printer Settings
Copy Printer Settings
The Copy Printer Settings tab includes the Copy Printer Settings and Copy Printer
Settings Report pages.
Copy Printer Settings
Copies the printer settings to the printers of the same configuration model on the same
network environment.
NOTE:
•Printer settings can be simultaneously copied to printers of up to 10 IP addresses.
•You cannot copy the Address Book when the destination printer has a fax job.
1Enter the IP address and password of the destination printer in the IP Address text
box and Password text box.
2Click the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list. button.
Copying the settings is complete.
NOTE:
•The connection time-out period is 60 seconds.
3Check the Copy the settings to the Host in the above list and reboot the printer
menu of the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool in the destination printer to verify if
the settings were successfully copied.
NOTE:
•If the destination printer settings are different, the settings of only the same items are copied.
Copy Printer Settings Report
Displays whether the printer setting is successfully copied to the destination printers.
NOTE:
•The history is cleared by turning off the printer.
Print Volume
Print Volume
The Print Volume tab includes the Print Volume and Dell ColorTrack pages.
Print Volume
Displays the number of printed pages. This page can also be displayed by clicking Print
SMTP Domain
Filtering
Domain
Filtering
Select the check box to enable Domain Filtering.
Allow Domain
List
Allows you to register up to five domains allowed for sending e-mails.
180
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
Volume in the left frame.
Dell ColorTrack
Specifies which users have access to color printing and to limit print volume per user.
*
This item is displayed only when ColorTrack Mode is On.
Printer Page Count Displays the total number of pages printed since the printer was
shipped from the factory.
Paper Used
Displays the number of pages printed for each paper size.
ColorTrack
Mode
Off Enables to print the data with no authentication information.
On Restricts printing based on the print user information registered in the
internal server.
Non Registered
User
Sets whether to permit the printing of data with no authentication
information. To permit the printing for non-account user, select the
check box.
Auto Color To
Mono Print
Sets whether to print all print jobs in black and white even when color
print is specified.
ColorTrack Error
Report
Sets whether to automatically print error-related information if
printing using ColorTrack results in an error.
User
Registration
*
Click Edit User Registration to display the Edit Print User
Registration page.
To register a user, click Create to open the Print User Settings page.
To delete a user, click Delete to open the Delete User page.
Clicking Back returns the screen to the status prior to deleting the
user.
To check or change the registered user, click Confirm / Change to
open the Print User Settings page.
User
Registration No.
Displays the user registration number. The Delete User button is
displayed when the user is already registered.
User Name Sets the user name.
Password Sets the user password using 4 to 12 alphanumeric characters.
Re-enter
password
Enter the password again to check it.
Color Mode
Limitation
Sets whether to limit color printing.
Upper Limit for
Color Print
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for color printing.
Cumulative
Color Page
Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for color printing.
Upper Limit for
Monochrome
Print
Sets the maximum number of pages allowed for monochrome
printing.
Cumulative
Monochrome
Page Count
Displays the cumulative number of pages printed for monochrome
printing.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
181
Address Book
E-Mail Address
The E-Mail Address tab includes the E-Mail Address, E-Mail Group and Default Setup
pages.
E-Mail Address
Displays the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page.
E-Mail Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the e-mail address entries on the E-Mail Address page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the E-Mail Address top page.
*
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
E-Mail Address (Delete)
Deletes the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Address page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Address
top page.
E-Mail Group
Displays the e-mail address entries registered on the E-Mail Group page.
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of user
IDs indicated on the button.
ID Displays the user ID.
Name Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no
registration.
Address Displays the e-mail address of the user.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected user ID.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry of the selected
user ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected user ID.
ID Displays the selected user ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name of the user registered under the
user ID, or enter a name for the new entry.
Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of the user, or enter an
e-mail address for the new entry.
Delete
*
GroupID Displays the group ID.
Name Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when
there is no registration.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.
182
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
E-Mail Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the e-mail address group entries on the E-Mail Group page, or create a
new entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click
Confirm / Change or Create on the E-Mail Group top page.
*
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
E-Mail Group (Delete)
Deletes the e-mail group entries registered on the E-Mail Group page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the E-Mail Group top
page.
Default Setup
Sets the default e-mail subject and message.
Server Address
The Server Address tab includes the Server Address page.
Server Address
Displays the server address entries registered on the Server Address page.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.
E-Mail Group ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
Delete
*
E-Mail Address Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID Displays the user ID.
Select the check box on the left to create the group.
Name Displays the user name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is no
registration.
Address Allows you to view or edit the e-mail address of an entry registered
under the selected user ID, or enter an e-mail address for the new
entry.
Default Subject Allows you to enter the default e-mail subject.
Body Text Allows you to enter the default e-mail message.
Address List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of IDs
indicated on the button.
ID Displays the server ID.
Name Displays the file directory name. (Not in Use) is displayed when there
is no registration.
Server Address Displays the address of the file directory.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected server ID.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
server ID.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
183
Server Address (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the server address entries on the Server Address page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the Server Address top page.
*1
You can edit this item only when you click Create.
*2
This item is available only when Server Type is set to SMB.
*3
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
Server Address (Delete)
Deletes the server address entries registered on the Server Address page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the Server Address
top page.
Phone Book
The Phone Book tab includes the FAX Speed Dial and FAX Group pages.
FAX Speed Dial
Displays the fax number entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected server ID.
ID Displays the selected server ID.
Name Allows you to view or change the server name assigned to the server
ID, or enter a new server name.
Server Type Allows you to view the server type if you click Confirm / Change.
Allows you to edit the server type if you click Create.
FTP
*1
Select this to store scanned data on a server via the FTP protocol.
SMB
*1
Select this to store scanned data on a computer via the Server
Message Block (SMB) protocol.
Server Address Allows you to view or edit the server address registered under the
server ID, or enter a new server address.
Share Name
*2
Allows you to view or edit the assigned shared name, or enter a new
shared name, when Server Type is set to SMB.
Server Path Allows you to view or edit the assigned server path, or enter a new
path.
Server Port
Number
Allows you to view or edit the assigned server port number, or enter a
new port number. If you leave the text box blank, the default port
number (FTP: 21, SMB: 139) is used.
Login Name Allows you to view or edit the login name that is required to access
the selected protocol, or enter a new login name.
Login Password Allows you to view or edit the password that is required to access the
selected protocol, or enter a new password.
Re-enter
Password
Confirms the set password.
Delete
*3
Speed Dial List to: Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed
dial codes indicated on the button.
Speed Dial Displays the speed dial ID.
184
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
FAX Speed Dial (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the speed dial entries on the FAX Speed Dial page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the FAX Speed Dial top page.
*
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Speed Dial (Delete)
Deletes the speed dial entries registered on the FAX Speed Dial page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Speed Dial
top page.
FAX Group
Displays the fax group entries registered on the FAX Group page.
FAX Group (Confirm/Change, Create)
Displays or edits the fax number group entries on the FAX Group page, or create a new
entry. The following items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Confirm /
Change or Create on the FAX Group top page.
Name Displays the assigned name for a speed dial ID.
Phone Number Displays the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is displayed when there is
no registration.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected speed dial code.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
speed dial code.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected speed dial code.
Speed Dial Displays the selected speed dial code.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name of an entry registered under the
speed dial code, or enter a name for the new entry.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under
the speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Delete
*
Deletes the entry for the speed dial code. This button is available only
on the dialog box for editing an existing entry.
ID Displays a fax group ID.
Name Displays the assigned group name. (Not in Use) is displayed when
there is no registration.
Delete Deletes the entry for the selected group ID.
Confirm / Change Displays a dialog box where you can edit the entry for the selected
group ID.
Create Displays a dialog box where you can create a new entry under the
selected group ID.
FAX Group ID Displays the selected group ID.
Name Allows you to view or edit the name assigned for the group ID, or
enter a new group name.
Delete
*
Deletes the current entry.
Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool |
185
*
This item is available only when you click Confirm / Change.
FAX Group (Delete)
Deletes the fax number group entries registered on the FAX Group page. The following
items are in the dialog box that appears when you click Delete on the FAX Group top
page.
Tray Management
Use the Tray Management menu to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in tray1
and the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray Management
FAX Speed Dial Speed Dial List
to:
Selecting each button displays a list of entries for the group of speed
dial codes indicated on the button.
Speed Dial Displays the speed dial code. Select the check box on the left to add
the speed dial code in the group.
Name Displays the name registered for the speed dial code. (Not in Use) is
displayed when there is no registration.
Phone Number Allows you to view or edit the fax number of an entry registered under
the selected speed dial code, or enter a fax number for the new entry.
Tray Settings MPF Mode Sets whether to use the print driver settings for the size and type of
paper loaded in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF).
MPF Paper
Size
*1
Sets the size of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Paper
Type
*1
Sets the type of paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom
Paper Size - Y
*1
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Custom
Paper Size - X
*1
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the MPF.
MPF Display
Tray Prompt
*1
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the MPF.
Tray 1 Paper
Size
Sets the size of paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Paper
Type
Sets the type of paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Custom
Paper Size - Y
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Custom
Paper Size - X
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in tray1.
Tray 1 Display
Tray Prompt
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in tray1.
Tray 2 Paper
Size
*2
Sets the size of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Paper
Type
*2
Sets the type of paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet feeder.
Tray 2 Custom
Paper Size - Y
*2
Sets the length of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
186
| Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool
*1
This item is available only when Use Panel Settings in MPF Mode is selected.
*2
This item is available only when the optional 550-sheet feeder is installed.
Tray 2 Custom
Paper Size - X
*2
Sets the width of custom size paper loaded in the optional 550-sheet
feeder.
Tray 2 Display
Tray Prompt
*2
Sets whether to display a popup message that prompts the user to set
the paper size and type when the paper is loaded in the optional
550-sheet feeder.
Tray Priority 1st Priority Sets the paper source to be used as the first priority.
2nd Priority Sets the paper source to be used as the second priority.
3rd Priority
*2
Sets the paper source to be used as the third priority.
Print Media Guidelines |
187
Print Media Guidelines
This section describes selecting and caring for print media. The printer provides
high-quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for
the printer helps to avoid printing troubles.
NOTE:
•Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet print media in the printer.
To help avoiding jam, see "Before Loading."
Supported Print Media
Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
Paper Size A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
B6 (128 × 182 mm)
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Statement (5.5 × 8.5 inches)
Envelope #10 (104.8 × 241.3 mm)
Monarch (98.4 × 190.5 mm)
DL (110 × 220 mm)
C5 (162 × 229 mm)
Custom
*1
:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 127 – 355.6 mm (5 – 14 inches)
188
| Print Media Guidelines
*1
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
*2
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
Tray1
Paper Type Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)
*2
Covers (Thick)
*2
Rough Surface
*2
Coated (Normal)
*2
Coated (Thick)
*2
Label (Light)
*2
Label (Normal)
*2
Envelope
*2
Recycled
Letterhead
*2
Preprinted
*2
Prepunched
*2
Color
Loading Capacity 50 sheets of the standard paper
Paper Size A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
B6 (128 × 182 mm)
A6 (105 × 148 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Statement (5.5 × 8.5 inches)
Envelope #10 (104.8 × 241.3 mm)
Monarch (98.4 × 190.5 mm)
DL (110 × 220 mm)
C5 (162 × 229 mm)
Custom
*1
:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 148 – 355.6 mm (5.8 – 14 inches)
Print Media Guidelines |
189
*1
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
*2
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
Optional 550-Sheet Feeder
Paper Type Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)
*2
Covers (Thick)
*2
Coated (Normal)
*2
Coated (Thick)
*2
Labels (Light)
*2
Labels (Normal)
*2
Envelope
*2
Recycled
Letterhead
*2
Preprinted
*2
Prepunched
*2
Color
Loading Capacity 250 sheets of the standard paper
Paper Size A4 (210 × 297 mm)
B5 (182 × 257 mm)
A5 (148 × 210 mm)
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches)
Folio (8.5 × 13 inches)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches)
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches)
Custom
*1
:
Width: 76.2 – 215.9 mm (3 – 8.5 inches)
Length: 190.5 – 355.6 mm (7.5 – 14 inches)
Paper Type Plain (Light)
Plain (Normal)
Plain (Thick)
Covers (Thin)
*2
Covers (Thick)
*2
Coated (Normal)
*2
Labels (Light)
*2
Labels (Normal)
*2
Recycled
Letterhead
*2
Preprinted
*2
Prepunched
*2
Color
Loading Capacity 550 sheets of the standard paper
190
| Print Media Guidelines
*1
XML Paper Specification (XPS) driver does not support custom size paper.
*2
Paper type that does not support printing on the back side of printed paper.
NOTE:
•For Plain and Label paper, you can preset the paper density by selecting the Paper Density (Light or
Normal) under Maintenance from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool.
Once you set the Paper Density settings, the printer uses the settings for Plain and Label paper.
Supported Paper Weight
Unacceptable Print Media
•Chemically treated paper used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless paper, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•Pre-printed paper with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Pre-printed paper that can be affected by the temperature in the fusing unit
•Pre-printed paper that requires a registration (the precise print location on the page)
greater than ±0.09 inch, such as Optical Character Recognition (OCR) forms. In
some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully
print on these forms.
•Erasable bond, synthetic paper, and thermal paper
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface paper, or curled paper
•Recycled paper containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that does not meet
DIN 19309
•Multiple-part forms or documents
•Talc or acid paper that may deteriorate print quality (blank spaces or blotches may
appear in the text)
Recommended Print Media
Proper print media selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
•For the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) xerographic paper.
Paper type Weight (g/m
2
)
Plain 60 – 90
Plain Thick 91 – 105
Recycled 60 – 90
Labels –
Covers 106 – 176
Covers Thick 177 – 220
Envelope –
Coated 106 – 176
Coated Thick 177 – 220
Letterhead 60 – 90
Preprinted 60 – 90
Prepunched 60 – 90
Color 60 – 90
Print Media Guidelines |
191
•For the best print quality in black and white, use 90 g/m
2
(24 lb) xerographic, grain
long paper.
•Print media designed for general business use also provides acceptable print quality.
•Laser printing process heats print media to high temperatures. Only use paper able
to withstand high temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing
hazardous emissions. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether
the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Recommended Pre-Printed Media and Letterheads
•Use grain long paper for best results.
•Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved
printing process.
•Use print media that absorb ink, but does not bleed.
•Avoid print media with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•Use print media printed with heat-resistant inks designed for use in xerographic
copying machines. The ink must withstand temperatures of 225°C (437°F) without
melting or releasing hazardous emissions.
•Use print media printed with inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or the
silicone in the fusing unit. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Recommended Pre-Punched Print Media
•Use only pre-punched paper made at the paper manufacturer.
•Do not drill print media which are already packaged in a ream. Using them may
result in paper jams.
•Pre-punched print media can include more paper dust than standard print media.
The printer may require more frequent cleaning, and feed reliability may not be as
good as standard print media.
•Weight guidelines for pre-punched print media are the same as non-punched print
media.
Recommended Envelopes
Depending on the envelopes, it is possible to expect variable levels of wrinkling.
•Use only high-quality envelopes that are designed for use in laser printers.
•Use envelopes made from 75 g/m
2
(20 lb bond) paper. You can use up to 105 g/m
2
(28 lb bond) weight for the envelope feeder as long as the cotton content is 25% or
less. Envelopes with 100% cotton content must not exceed 90 g/m
2
(24 lb bond)
weight.
•Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 205°C (401°F) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you are in doubt,
contact your envelope supplier.
•Check for high humidity. High humidity (higher than 60%) and high printing
temperature may seal the envelopes.
•Do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist
192
| Print Media Guidelines
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way
–Contain windows, coated linings, self-stick adhesives, holes, perforations,
cutouts, or embossing
–Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
–Have an interlocking design
–Have postage stamps attached
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
–Have nicked edges or bent corners
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
Recommended Labels
•Label adhesives, face sheet, and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of
205°C (401°F) and pressure of 25 pounds per square inch (psi) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.
•Use labels without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous
emissions.
•Do not use label sheets with a slick backing material.
•Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.
•Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. It is
recommended that zone coating of the adhesive is done at least 1 mm (0.04 inch)
away from edges. Otherwise, a jam may occur in the printer, and adhesive material
may contaminate the printer and cartridges.
WARNING:
• Contaminating the printer and cartridges with adhesive could void your printer and cartridge
warranties.
Print Media Storage Guidelines
For proper print media storage, the following guidelines help you to avoid print media
feeding problems and uneven print quality.
•Store print media in an environment where the temperature is approximately 21°C
(70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.
•Store print media on a flat surface so that the edges do not buckle or curl.
•Print media should be stored on pallets, cartons, shelves, or in cabinets, rather than
directly on the floor.
•Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.
Loading Print Media |
193
Loading Print Media
Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
Before loading any print media, identify the recommended print side of the print media.
This information is usually indicated on the print media package.
Before Loading
The following instructions describe how to avoid paper jams:
•Use only laser print media. Do not use ink jet paper in the printer.
•Use only recommended print media. See "Print Media Guidelines."
•Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment. See "Print Media Storage
Guidelines."
•Do not overload the print media sources. Make sure that the print media stack height
does not exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the tray.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled print media.
•Flex, fan, and straighten the print media before loading.
•Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed.
•Do not mix different print media sizes, weights, or types in the same print media
source.
•Make sure that the recommended print side is facing up when you load the print
media.
•Do not remove the feeding tray during printing.
•Make sure that all cables that connect to the printer are attached correctly.
•Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
•If jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently, wipe the retard rollers in the
tray or Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) with a cloth moistened with water.
Loading Print Media in Tray1 and the Optional
550-Sheet Feeder
NOTE:
•To avoid paper jams, do not remove the tray while printing is in progress.
1For the optional 550-sheet feeder, pull the tray halfway out of the printer.
For Tray1, proceed to step 2.
194
|Loading Print Media
2Hold the tray with both hands, and then remove it from the printer.
3Adjust the paper guides according to the paper size that you want to load.
NOTE:
•When you load Legal-size paper, extend the tray while pushing the lever located on the front
part of the tray.
Loading Print Media |
195
4Before loading the print media, flex and fan the sheets. Straighten the edges of the
stack on a level surface.
5Load the print media into the tray with the recommended print side facing up.
NOTE:
•Do not exceed the maximum fill line in the tray. Overfilling the tray may cause paper jams.
•When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
•When loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead,
Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper."
6Make sure that paper guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media stack.
NOTE:
•Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
NOTE:
•When loading user-specified print media, adjust the width guides and slide the extendable
part of the tray by pinching the length guide and sliding it until it rests lightly against the edge
of the paper.
7Insert the tray into the printer and push until it stops.
196
| Loading Print Media
NOTE:
•If the front side of the tray is extended, the tray protrudes when it is inserted into the printer.
8When the Tray Configuration screen appears, tap Size.
The following shows the Tray1 screen as an example.
NOTE:
•Set the same paper size and type as the actual paper being loaded. An error may occur if the
paper size or type setting is different from the loaded paper.
9Select or until the desired paper size appears, and then select the desired
paper size.
10 Tap Type.
11 Select or until the desired paper type appears, and then select the desired
paper type.
Loading Print Media |
197
12 Tap OK.
Loading Envelopes in the Tray1
NOTE:
•Use only recommended envelopes. See "Recommended Envelopes."
The following guidelines describe how to load envelopes.
•Use only freshly unpackaged and undamaged envelopes.
If you do not load envelopes in the tray right after they have been removed from the
package, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to
flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes in the tray.
•Use only same size envelopes for a single print job.
•The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the tray is
approximately 27.5 mm (1.08 inch) (20 envelopes).
•When printing on envelopes, set the print media source to the tray. From the print
driver, select Envelope for the paper type, and then select the correct size of the
envelope.
•Adjust the paper guides accordingly after envelopes are loaded.
Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL
Load the envelopes with the flaps closed and the print side facing up. Make sure that the
flaps are on the left side when you face towards the printer.
C5
When loading envelopes with the flaps open, load the envelopes so that the print side
Feed direction
198
| Loading Print Media
faces up and the bottom edge (the edge with no flaps) enters the printer first.
When loading envelopes with the flaps closed, load the envelopes so that the print side
faces up and the top edge (the edge with flaps) enters the printer first.
Loading Print Media in the Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)
NOTE:
•Do not add or remove print media when there is still print media in the MPF or when the printer is
printing from the MPF. This may result in a paper jam.
•Do not place objects on the MPF.
•Do not apply excessive force on the MPF or press it down.
•If a jam occurs with print media, feed one sheet at a time through the MPF.
•The label on the MPF shows how to load the MPF with paper, and how to turn an envelope for
printing.
1Gently pull and open the MPF cover.
NOTE:
•Extend the extension tray as necessary.
Loading Print Media |
199
2Slide the width guides according to the paper size that you want to load.
3Insert all print media facing up and top edge first into the MPF.
NOTE:
•Do not force the print media into the MPF.
•When loading coated paper, load one sheet at a time.
•When loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, see "Loading Letterhead,
Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched Paper."
4Make sure that both width guides rest lightly against the edge of the print media
stack.
NOTE:
•Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
200
| Loading Print Media
5When the MPF Configuration screen appears, tap Size.
6Tap or until the desired paper size appears, and then select the size.
7Tap Type.
8Tap or until the desired paper type appears, and then select the type.
9Tap OK.
Loading Envelopes in the MPF
NOTE:
•Use only recommended envelopes. See "Recommended Envelopes."
The following guidelines describe how to load envelopes.
•Use only freshly unpackaged and undamaged envelopes.
If you do not load envelopes in the MPF right after they have been removed from the
package, they may bulge. To avoid jams, press firmly across the whole envelopes to
flatten them as shown in the illustration before loading the envelopes in the MPF.
•Use only same size envelopes for a single print job.
•The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded in the MPF is
approximately 5 mm (0.19 inch) (5 envelopes).
•When printing on envelopes, set the print media source to the MPF. From the print
driver, select Envelope for the paper type, and then select the correct size of the
envelope.
•Adjust the width guides accordingly after envelopes are loaded.
Feed direction
Loading Print Media |
201
Envelope #10, Monarch, or DL
Load the envelopes with the flaps closed and the print side facing up. Make sure that the
flaps are on the left side when you face towards the printer.
C5
When loading envelopes with the flaps open, load the envelopes with the print side
facing up and the bottom edge first into the MPF.
When loading envelopes with the flaps closed, load the envelopes with the print side
facing up and the top edge first into the MPF.
Loading Labels in the MPF
NOTE:
•Use only recommended labels. See "Recommended Labels."
The following guidelines describe how to load labels:
•Do not load labels in the MPF together with other types of paper.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing,
resulting in a jam.
•Set the paper type to Label from the print driver.
202
| Loading Print Media
•Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.
•Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the die-cut.
•Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 inch) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or
between die-cuts of the label.
•Do not print a label through the printer more than once.
Loading Letterhead, Pre-Printed, and Pre-Punched
Paper
Letterhead, pre-printed, and pre-punched paper must be inserted bottom edge first with
the print side facing down as shown in the following illustration.
NOTE:
•Make sure that Letterhead 2 Sided or Letterhead Duplex Mode is set to Enable, and Type
is set to Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched on the operator panel even when printing on
a single side. You can also set the same setting using the print driver.
For Tray1 and optional 550-sheet feeder:
•Face up
•Letterhead enters the printer first.
For MPF:
•Face up
•Letterhead enters the printer first.
Linking Trays
The printer links the trays when you load the same size and type of print media in them.
The first tray is utilized until the print media runs out after which the next tray is used.
NOTE:
•The print media should be the same size and type in each tray.
The Multipurpose Feeder (MPF) cannot be linked to any of the tray sources.
After loading the selected trays with the same size and type of print media, select the
LETTERHEAD
LETTERHEAD
Loading Print Media |
203
Paper Type setting in the Tray Settings component for each tray.
To disable tray linking, change the paper type for one of the trays to a unique value.
NOTE:
•If different types of print media of the same size are loaded in the trays, the printer links them if the
paper type is not specified in the print driver properties/preferences.
204
| Loading Documents
Loading Documents
You can use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) or the document glass to
load a document. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) paper
at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE:
•To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use the document glass
instead of the DADF.
Before Loading Documents in the DADF
The following instructions describe how to avoid paper jams:
•Do not use document smaller than 139.7 mm by 139.7 mm (5.5 inches by 5.5 inches)
and larger than 215.9 mm by 355.6 mm (8.5 inches by 14 inches)
•Do not use booklets, pamphlets, photographs, transparencies, and documents
having other unusual characteristics.
•Do not use carbon or carbon-backed paper, coated paper, onion skin or thin paper,
wrinkled or creased paper, curled or rolled paper, and torn paper.
•Do not use documents with staples or paper clips.
•Do not use documents exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as
glue, ink and correcting fluid.
•Do not use document that you have cut or trimmed.
•Do not use wrinkled, creased, damp, or curled document.
•Do not mix different sizes, weights, or types of document in the DADF.
•Flex, fan, and straighten document before you load it.
•Do not overload the DADF. Make sure that the document stack height does not
exceed the maximum height indicated by the load-line labels in the DADF.
•If jams caused by misfeeding paper occur frequently, wipe the DADF feed rollers
with a cloth moistened with water.
Loading a Document in the Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder (DADF)
1Adjust the document guides according to the document size that you want to load,
and place the document(s) facing up with the top edge of the document(s) first into
the DADF.
Loading Documents |
205
NOTE:
•Overtightening the guides may cause jams.
•Before loading the document(s) on the DADF, straighten the edges of the stack of the
document(s).
•Use the document stopper when copying a legal-size document.
Loading a Document on the Document Glass
NOTE:
•Make sure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the DADF, it takes
priority over the document on the document glass.
1Open the document cover.
2Place the document facing down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.
206
|Loading Documents
3Close the document cover.
NOTE:
•Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the
toner consumption.
•If you are copying/scanning/faxing a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until its
hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or magazine is thicker
than 30 mm, start copying/scanning/faxing with the cover open.
|
207
4
Printing, Copying, Scanning,
Faxing, and Dell Document Hub
Printing 208
Copying 217
Scanning 220
Faxing 245
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) 262
208
|Printing
Printing
This chapter covers tips for printing, how to print certain information from the printer,
and how to cancel a job.
NOTE:
•Selecting the appropriate print media and loading them properly into the paper tray is key to
producing good quality prints and reducing paper jams. See "Print Media Guidelines" and "Loading
Print Media."
Sending a Job to Print
NOTE:
•Print settings made from the print driver have precedence over the menu settings made from the
operator panel or Tool Box.
•If you are not familiar with a feature in the print driver window, open the online Help for more
information.
The following procedure uses a typical Windows
®
and OS X program as an example.
1Open the file you want to print.
2From the File menu, select Print.
3Check that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box, and then check and
change the print settings in the dialog box.
4For Windows
®
, click Preferences, adjust print settings that are not available in the
dialog box, and then click OK.
For OS X, proceed to step 5.
5Click Print.
NOTE:
•You can switch the paper size loaded in the tray between A4 and letter. Also, you can switch the
paper size between A5 and statement. When you want to switch the page size, load the print media
of the selected size.
See "A4<>Letter Switch" and "A5<>Statement Switch."
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel a job using the operator panel or a computer.
Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel
Canceling a Job While Print Is in Progress
Tap Stop.
The print job in progress is canceled.
NOTE:
•All the following jobs are not canceled.
Canceling a Job Before Printing Starts
1Press the (Job Status) button.
2Tap the job you want to cancel.
Printing |
209
3Tap Stop Stop Job.
Canceling a Job From a Computer
Canceling a Job From the Taskbar (Windows
®
Only)
When you send a job to print, a small printer icon appears in the bottom right corner of
the taskbar.
1Double-click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2Select the job you want to cancel.
3Press <Delete> on the keyboard.
Canceling a Job From the Dock (OS X Only)
When you send a job to print, the printer icon appears in the Dock.
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Click the printer icon.
A list of print jobs appears in the printer window.
2Click the delete job button on the right.
Duplex Printing
The duplex printing feature allows you to print on both sides of a sheet of paper.
NOTE:
•The duplex printing feature does not support thick cover paper, thick coated paper, labels, and
envelopes.
Using Duplex Print
For Windows
®
:
The following procedure uses a typical Windows
®
program on Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10 as an example.
1Open the file you want to print.
2Open the print dialog box from the program.
3Select the print driver, and then click Preferences.
4In the Paper Source drop-down list box, select a paper tray.
5In the Duplex drop-down list box, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge.
NOTE:
•For details about the Flip on Short Edge and Flip on Long Edge options, see
"
Flip on Short
Edge
"
and
"
Flip on Long Edge.
"
6Click OK.
7Click OK or Print.
210
|Printing
For OS X:
The following procedure uses TextEdit on OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Open the file you want to print.
2Open the print dialog box from the program.
3In the TextEdit drop-down list box, click Printer Features.
4In the Feature Sets drop-down list box, click Paper Handling.
5In the Duplex drop-down list box, select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge.
6Click Print.
Using Booklet Print
The booklet print feature prints a document as a booklet. The pages are arranged in the
correct order when the printout is collated or stapled.
NOTE:
•When the XML Paper Specification (XPS) or PostScript (PS) driver is used, booklet print is not
available.
•You must select Flip on Long Edge in the Duplex when using the Booklet Print feature.
Flip on Long Edge Assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait orientation and top edge for landscape orientation). The
following illustration shows long-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Portrait Landscape
Printing |
211
Using Stored Print
When you send a job to the printer, you can specify in the print driver to store the job in
the memory. When you are ready to print the job, go to the printer and use the operator
panel to identify which job in the memory you want to print.
NOTE:
•The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
•The Stored Print feature is available when:
- The RAM disk is enabled in the printer menu.
-RAM Disk is set to Available in the print driver.
Overview
The Stored Print feature includes the following job types.
Read each description to select optimum job type for your print job.
If you want to print confidential documents, see "Secure Print" and "Private Mail Box
Print."
If you want to store the print job in the printer for re-printing, see "Private Mail Box Print"
and "Public Mail Box Print."
If you want to prevent large number of misprinted copies, see "Proof Print."
Secure Print
You can temporarily store print jobs secured with a password in the memory. Users with
the password can print them from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print
confidential documents. A stored print job is deleted after you print it or at a designated
time.
Flip on Short Edge Assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait orientation and left edge for landscape orientation). The
following illustration shows short-edge binding for portrait and
landscape pages:
Portrait Landscape
212
|Printing
Private Mail Box Print
You can store print jobs in the printer for re-printing with a password. The stored jobs
remain in the printer until you delete them from the operator panel. Only users with the
password can print them from the operator panel. This feature can be used to print
confidential documents.
Public Mail Box Print
You can store print jobs in the printer for re-printing without a password. The stored jobs
remain in the printer until you delete them from the operator panel. Any user can print
them from the operator panel.
Proof Print
The collated print job is stored in the memory, but a single copy is printed so you can
check the print result. If you do not have problems with the print result, you can choose
to print more copies. This prevents large number of misprinted copies.
Send confidential
data.
Enter the password
from the operator
panel.
Data is deleted at a
designated time.
Print data.
Confidential
Send data.
Enter the password
from the operator
panel.
Print data.
Send data.
Print data.
Printing |
213
Procedures for Printing Stored Print
NOTE:
•The Stored Print feature is not available when a print job is too large for the available memory.
•The Stored Print feature is available when using the Printer Control Language (PCL) or PostScript
(PS) driver.
Storing Print Jobs With the Print Driver
To use the Stored Print feature, you need to select Secure Print, Proof Print, Private
Mailbox, or Public Mailbox from Job Type in the General tab of the print driver. The job
is stored in the memory until you request to print it from the operator panel.
NOTE:
•You must specify a password for the Secure Print and Private Mail Box Print jobs.
•If a document name is not assigned to your print job in the print driver, the job's name is identified
using the printer's time and date of submission to distinguish it from other jobs you have stored
under your name.
Printing the Stored Jobs From the Operator Panel
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Print.
3Select a job type.
If the desired job type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
4Select the desired user ID.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
If you have selected Secure Print or Private Mailbox in step 3, enter the
password using the number pad, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
•If you enter an invalid password, the message Incorrect password Try again. appears.
Tap Close to return to the screen for entering the password.
5Select the desired document.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
To specify the number of copies, tap Quantity.
NOTE:
•For Secure Print, Quantity is not available.
6For Secure Print, tap Print and Delete.
Send data.
One set is
printed.
Check if the print
result is OK.
Print the rest of sets from
the operator panel.
214
|Printing
For Private Mailbox Print, tap Print.
NOTE:
•For Secure Print, the data in the memory is deleted after printing.
•For Private Mailbox Print, you can delete the data in the memory after printing if you select the
Print and Delete check box.
7Tap OK.
The stored job will be printed.
Deleting Stored Jobs
With Secure Print, a job that has been stored is deleted after printing or deleted at a
designated time entered on the operator panel.
For other jobs, these jobs remain stored until you delete them from the operator panel.
To delete the stored jobs:
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Print.
3Select a job type.
If the desired job type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
4Select the desired user ID.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
If you have selected Secure Print or Private Mailbox in step 3, enter the
password using the number pad, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
•If you enter an invalid password, the message Incorrect password Try again. appears.
Tap Close to return to the screen for entering the password.
5Select the desired document.
If the desired document is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
6Tap Delete.
Printing From USB Flash Drive
The USB Direct Print feature allows you to print files stored in a USB flash drive without
using a computer.
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the printer, do not connect any device other than a USB flash drive to the
front USB port of the printer.
• Do not remove the USB flash drive from the front USB port until the printer has finished printing.
NOTE:
•If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Supported USB Flash Drive
For the front USB port of the printer, you can use a USB flash drive with the following
specification:
Printing |
215
•USB 2.0 and 1.1
•Type A connector
•Metal shielded
•FAT16, FAT32, or VFAT file system
NOTE:
•If the USB flash drive is formatted in a file system other than the above, the printer may not detect
the USB flash drive.
•A USB flash drive with authentication feature and some brands of USB flash drive cannot be used
with this printer.
Supported File Formats
Files in the following file formats can be printed directly from a USB flash drive:
•PDF
•TIFF
•JPEG
Printing a PDF/TIFF or JPEG File in a USB Flash Drive
1Press the (Home) button.
2Insert a USB flash drive to the front USB port of the printer.
3Tap Print PDF/TIFF or Print JPEG.
4Select the desired file.
If the desired file is not displayed, swipe the screen or tap folders.
NOTE:
•Only the following characters are displayed on the touch panel:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ‘ - @ {} ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^
•Up to 10 PDF/TIFF or 100 JPEG files can be selected and printed in display order.
5Tap , and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
216
|Printing
6Tap Print.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become
unusable.
NOTE:
•Color printing is secured with a password if the Functions Control setting for USB Direct
Print is set to On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the
Functions Control setting for USB Direct Print to On(Color Password), you are
required to enter the four-digit password.
•Only PDF/TIFF or JPEG files created using the scan function of the printer can be printed
through the USB Direct Print feature.
7Remove the USB flash drive from the printer.
CAUTION:
• Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive.
Printer Settings
You can change most of the print settings from the program you are printing from.
Settings from the program update the default system settings for the printer. Settings
from the print driver only apply to the job that you are currently sending to the printer.
If you cannot change a setting from the program, use the operator panel, Tool Box on
the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool, or the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool. Changing a system setting from the operator panel, Tool Box, or Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool makes that setting the user default.
You can verify the detailed system settings by printing a system settings report. For
details about how to print a system settings report, see "
Report / List
."
You can reset settings to their default values from the operator panel.
See "Resetting Defaults."
To specify your own default settings:
1Press the (Information) button.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings.
3Tap PCL, PS, or PDF.
4Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
5Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
6Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.
Copying |
217
Copying
NOTE:
•If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Making Copies From the Document Glass
NOTE:
•A computer connection is not required for copying.
•Remove any documents from the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) before copying
from the document glass.
•Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy output. For best results,
clean the document glass before use. See "Cleaning the Scanner."
1Place a single document facing down on the document glass, and then close the
document cover.
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Copy.
4Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
6Tap Copy.
NOTE:
•To cancel a copy job, tap Stop at any time while scanning a document.
Making Copies From the DADF
CAUTION:
• Do not load more than 50 sheets into the DADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the
document output tray. The document output tray should be emptied before it exceeds 50
sheets or your documents may be damaged.
NOTE:
•A computer connection is not required for copying.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Copy.
4Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
218
|Copying
6Tap Copy.
NOTE:
•To cancel a copy job, tap Stop at any time while scanning a document.
Using the ID Copy
NOTE:
•If the Functions Control setting is set to Disable, the function is disabled and the menu is not
displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its
original size by tapping ID Copy on the touch panel. This feature helps to show both
sides of an ID card in one page in its original size.
1Place an ID card facing down on the document glass, and then close the document
cover.
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap ID Copy.
4Check and change the copy settings.
See "Copy."
5In Quantity, tap – or + to specify the number of copies.
6Tap Copy.
NOTE:
•Color copy is secured with a password if the Functions Control setting for Copy is set to
On(Color Password). If you set Output Color to Full Color and the Functions Control
setting for Copy to On(Color Password), you are required to enter the four-digit password.
After the front side of the ID card is scanned, the screen prompts you to turn over
the card.
To copy the back side:
aTurn the ID card over.
bTap Continue.
To copy only one side:
aTap Print Now.
Changing the Default Copy Settings
The default settings of the copy menu options such as Output Color, Select Tray,
and Darken/Lighten can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a
document, the specified default settings are used unless they are changed using the
operator panel.
The settings on Default Settings will be reflected when you create a new tile. If you
change the settings on Default Settings after creating the new tile, it does not affect
the settings of the tile you created earlier. See "Adding a New Tile."
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Tool Box on the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management
Tool or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See the help on the Tool Box or "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
Copying |
219
To specify your own default settings:
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Default Settings Copy Defaults.
3Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
4Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
220
|Scanning
Scanning
NOTE:
•If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is not displayed on the screen. See "Functions Control."
Scanning Overview
The printer provides several ways to scan your document. There are two main scanning
types. One is operated on the printer side without using the scanner driver, and the other
is operated on the computer side using a software and the scanner driver.
The following illustration shows overview for each scanning type.
The resolution setting to use when you scan an item depends on the item type and how
you plan to use the image or document after you scan it to your computer. For the best
results, use these recommended settings.
Scanning above the recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the
Type Resolution
Documents 300 dpi black-and-white or 200 dpi grayscale or
color
Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black-and-white or 300 dpi grayscale
Photographs and pictures 100–200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale
Images for an inkjet printer 150–300 dpi
Images for a high-resolution printer 300–600 dpi
Scan
USB
E-mail
FTP Server/
Shared Folder
Computer/
Mobile Device
Operate from the Printer
Operate from the Computer/Mobile Device
"Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP"
"Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail"
"Scanning to a USB Flash Drive"
"Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection”
“Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection"
"Scanning Using the Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) Driver”
“Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver"
"Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on Devices (WSD)"
"Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct"
Scanning |
221
program. To scan above the recommended resolutions, preview (or pre-scan) and crop
the image to reduce the size before scanning the image.
Tips for Easy Network Scanning
•The network scanning with the Scan to Computer feature is recommended if you
are not familiar with the network scanning setup. It provides the simple and easy
steps for your convenience. For details, see "Scanning to a Computer With a
Network Connection."
•Before using the Scan to Network Folder feature, configure the network connection
details using the Address Book Editor if you are not familiar with the setup using the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
The Address Book Editor helps to register the scanning destination details to the
printer.
Scanning to a Computer With a USB Connection
You can send scanned data from the operator panel to a computer connected via USB
cable. The scanned data is saved in the Documents folder for Windows
®
or on the
desktop for OS X by default. To change the location to save, see "Changing the Location
to Save the Scanned Data."
NOTE:
•You must connect your computer via USB for selecting the Scan to Computer feature from the
operator panel. Network connection is not supported.
•This feature is supported on both Windows
®
and OS X.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Scan to Computer.
4Select a computer.
If the desired computer is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5Check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan to Computer."
6Tap Scan.
Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection
If the printer is connected to a computer via the Scan to Computer network using Web
Services on Devices (WSD), you can send scanned data to a computer.
NOTE:
•You need to setup connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
•Web Services on Devices (WSD) is supported only on Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8,
Windows
®
8.1, and Windows
®
10.
Printer Setup for Scan to Web Services on Devices (WSD)
Setup the printer and computer for connection using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
222
|Scanning
Checking the Printer Setting
To use this scanning method, make sure that the Web Services on Devices (WSD) is
enabled from the operator panel of the printer or on the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool. See "Port Settings" or "Protocols."
Setting Up the Computer
NOTE:
•For Windows
®
8, Windows
®
8.1, and Windows
®
10, the computer automatically connects the
printer using Web Services on Devices (WSD). There is no need to install the printer manually.
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7 as an example.
1Click Start Computer Network.
2Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Install.
The printer is connected using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
3Right-click the icon for the printer, and then click Scan profiles.
4Specify the various settings of the profile, including the Source where the
documents are loaded.
Scanning and Sending Images to the Computer
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Scan to Computer.
NOTE:
•Whether to scan from the DADF or from the document glass can be specified in the scan
profile. Make sure to specify the scan profile accordingly if you want to scan the document
from the DADF.
4Select a computer.
If the desired computer is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5Specify the type of scan.
If the desired type is not displayed, swipe the screen.
For details about the type of scan, see "Scan to Computer."
Scanning |
223
6Tap Scan.
Changing the Location to Save the Scanned Data
Use Dell Printer Hub (Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw) or Dell Print Management Tool
(Dell S2825cdn) to change the output destination of the obtained image files and to
select whether to open the image files using the related program.
NOTE:
•Dell Printer Hub and Dell Print Management Tool are supported on only Windows
®
7 or later.
To open Dell Printer Hub:
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7, Windows
®
10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows
®
7:
Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub.
For Windows
®
10:
Click the Start button Dell Printer Hub.
For OS X 10.10:
Click Finder Applications Dell Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer -
H625cdw/Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer - H825cdw/Dell Color Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2825cdn, and then double-click ScanButton Manager.
Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on
Devices (WSD)
If the printer is connected to a computer via network using Web Services on Devices
224
|Scanning
(WSD), you can scan documents from the computer.
NOTE:
•To scan from the computer using Web Services on Devices (WSD), you need to setup connection
using Web Services on Devices (WSD).
•Web Services on Devices (WSD) is supported only on Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8,
Windows
®
8.1, and Windows
®
10.
Preparations for Scanning From the Computer
The same preparations are necessary as in using the Scan to Computer feature. See
"Scanning to a Computer With a Network Connection."
Scanning From the Computer
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7 and Windows
®
10 as example.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Click Start Devices and Printers.
For Windows
®
10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Control Panel
Hardware and Sound Devices and Printers.
3Right-click the printer, and then select Start scan.
4Specify the necessary settings for scanning, and then click Scan.
NOTE:
•When you use Windows Vista
®
, use the drawing software such as Microsoft
®
Photo Gallery,
select the printer connected using the Web Services on Devices (WSD), and start scanning.
Scanning Using the TWAIN Driver
With the TWAIN driver, you can import scanned images to a software such as Adobe
®
Photoshop
®
.
NOTE:
•Both USB and Network connections are supported.
•This feature is supported on Windows
®
and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
•To check and set the IP address of the printer, or set the password for Functions Control feature
when PC Scan is set to On (Password). For details, see "Managing the Scanner."
The following procedure uses typical program that supports TWAIN as an example.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Start the graphic software that supports TWAIN, such as Adobe
®
Photoshop
®
.
3Select the scanner from the TWAIN menu on the graphic software, specify the
necessary settings, and then start scanning on the window such as shown below.
For details on operating the graphic software, see the manuals of your software.
For Windows
®
:
Scanning |
225
For OS X:
NOTE:
•The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
Scanning Using the Windows
®
Image Acquisition
(WIA) Driver
Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) is one of the standard components provided by
Windows
®
XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners.
Unlike the TWAIN driver, the Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) driver allows you to scan
an image and easily manipulate those images without using additional software.
With the Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) driver, you can import scanned images to
Microsoft
®
programs such as Windows
®
Photo Gallery and Microsoft
®
Paint.
NOTE:
•Both USB and Network connections including Web Services on Devices (WSD) are supported.
•The Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) driver is supported only on Windows
®
computers.
•To check and set the IP address of the printer, or set the password for Functions Control feature
when PC Scan is set to On (Password). For details, see "Managing the Scanner."
226
|Scanning
Scanning an Image From the Drawing Software
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7 as an example.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Start the drawing software, such as Microsoft
®
Paint for Windows
®
.
NOTE:
•When using Windows Vista
®
or Windows Server
®
2008, use Windows
®
Photo Gallery instead
of Microsoft
®
Paint.
•When using programs that utilize Windows
®
Image Acquisition (WIA) 2.0, such as Windows
®
Fax and Scan on Windows Vista
®
, Windows
®
7, Windows
®
8, Windows
®
8.1, and Windows
®
10,
the Feeder (Scan both sides) option can be selected for duplex scanning.
3Click the Paint button From scanner or camera.
The following image uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
NOTE:
•The screen image may vary depending on the operating system.
4Select your desired type of picture, and then click Adjust the quality of the scanned
picture.
The Advanced Properties dialog box appears.
5Click the desired properties OK.
6Click Scan Save.
Scanning Using Wi-Fi Direct
This section provides information for Wi-Fi Direct scanning. Wi-Fi Direct allows your
mobile devices such as computers, smartphones, and tablets, to connect to the printer
directly via a Wi-Fi network. With Wi-Fi Direct, you can scan documents from your
mobile devices directly without an access point or a wireless router.
Scanning |
227
To setup and connect using Wi-Fi Direct, See ”Setting Up Wi-Fi Direct.”
NOTE:
•Wi-Fi Direct is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•The maximum number of mobile devices that can be connected via the Wi-Fi Direct network is 3.
•You cannot connect your mobile device to the Internet via the printer’s Wi-Fi Direct network.
•Depending on the mobile device, the channel used to connect the mobile device to the printer via
Wi-Fi Direct may differ from the channel used by the printer to connect to a network via Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode. In such a case, simultaneous connection with Wi-Fi Direct and Wi-Fi
infrastructure mode may not work properly.
•The printer connected with Wi-Fi Direct supports the following protocols;
LPD, Port9100, WSD
*
, Bonjour (mDNS), SNMPv1/v2c, Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, TWAIN,
WIA, ICA.
*
WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Scanning via Wi-Fi Direct
The scanning procedure varies depending on the mobile device and the application you
are using. Refer to the manual supplied with your mobile device or application to scan.
Scanning to a Computer or Server With SMB/FTP
You can scan and send the scanned data to a shared folder on a computer or an FTP
server.
NOTE:
•This feature does not require a network scanner driver.
Overview
The Scan to Network Folder feature allows you to send the scanned data to a computer
or FTP server.
Required Operating Systems:
For FTP:
NOTE:
•For details about how to configure the FTP service, refer to the manual supplied with the software.
•Windows Vista
®
supports IPv4 only.
Scan
Using FTP
Using SMB
FTP Server
Computer
Computer
228
|Scanning
•Windows
®
Windows Server
®
FTP service of Microsoft
®
Internet Information Services
•Mac OS X 10.7 or later operating systems
FTP service of Mac OS X
For SMB:
This feature is supported on Windows Server
®
2008 or later and Mac OS X 10.7 or later.
Overview for Scanning to an FTP Server
The following is a typical setup flow for sending scanned data to an FTP server:
1Set SMB/FTP Destination into the Address Book.
See "Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book."
2Send the scanned data on the network.
See "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Overview for Scanning to a Shared Folder Using SMB
NOTE:
•The setup for Scan to Network Folder via SMB can be configured easily with the bundled Address
Book Editor utility.
For details about Address Book Editor, see "Using Address Book Editor."
•Scan to Network Folder can be also accomplished with the Web Services on Devices (WSD)
function.
For details about scanning using the Web Services on Devices (WSD) function, see "Scanning to a
Computer With a Network Connection" and "Scanning From a Computer Using Web Services on
Devices (WSD)."
The following is a typical setup flow for sending scanned data to a shared folder using
SMB:
1Set a user account.
See "Setting a User Account (SMB Only)."
2Create a shared folder.
See "Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)."
3Set SMB/FTP Destination into the Address Book.
See "Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book."
4Send the scanned data on the network.
See "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Setting a User Account (SMB Only)
To send scanned data to a SMB shared folder, it is necessary to have a shared folder on a
computer. To create a shared folder, a user account with a valid password is required.
For Windows
®
:
Scanning |
229
If the user account you are going to use does not have a login password, set a password
with the following procedure.
After checking the login user name and password of the user account, proceed to
"Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)."
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7, Windows
®
10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows
®
7:
1Click Start Control Panel User Accounts and Family Safety User Accounts
Create a password for your account.
2Add in a password for your user login account.
For Windows
®
10:
1Right-click the Start button, and then click Settings.
2Click Accounts Sign-in options Add under Password.
3Add in a password for your user login account.
For OS X 10.10:
1Click System Preferences Users & Groups Change Password.
2Enter a password for your user login account in New password.
3Re-enter the password in Verify.
Creating a Shared Folder (SMB Only)
Create a shared folder to store the scanned data from the printer.
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7, Windows
®
10, and OS X 10.10 as examples.
For Windows
®
7 and Windows
®
10:
1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
MyShare is used as an example folder name in this procedure.
2Right-click on the folder, and then click Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
3Click the Sharing tab Advanced Sharing.
230
|Scanning
4Select the Share this folder check box.
5Enter a shared name in the Share name box.
NOTE:
•Write down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure.
6Click Permissions to create a write permission for this folder.
7Click Add.
8Search user login name by performing either of the following:
•Click Advanced, and then search user login name.
•Enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select text box, and
then click Check Names.
Myself is used as an example login name in the following illustration.
9Click OK.
Scanning |
231
10 Click the user login name that you have just entered, and then select the Full
Control check box.
This permits the document to be sent into this folder.
NOTE:
•Do not use Everyone as the user login name.
11 Click OK.
NOTE:
•To add sub-folders, create new folders in the shared folder you have created.
For example:
Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic, Third-level folder name: John
You should now see MyShare\MyPic\John in your directory.
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Setting SMB/FTP Destination
Into the Address Book."
For OS X 10.10:
1Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer.
MyShare is used as an example folder name.
2Click the created folder File Get Info.
3Select the Shared folder check box.
4Open System Preferences, and then click Sharing.
5Select the File Sharing check box, and then click Options.
6Select the Share Files and folders using SMB and account name check boxes.
7Click Done.
When you are finished creating a shared folder, proceed to "Setting SMB/FTP Destination
Into the Address Book."
Setting SMB/FTP Destination Into the Address Book
You can register the connection details for SMB and FTP server in the address book using
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool or Address Book Editor.
Before entering the destination information, make sure that you have the IP address of
your computer ready. See "Confirming the IP Address of Your Computer."
232
|Scanning
After you finish registering the destination information of the SMB or FTP server, proceed
to "Sending the Scanned Data on the Network."
Confirming the IP Address of Your Computer
Perform the following procedure to check the IP address of the computer.
For Windows
®
:
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10 as an example.
1Click Start All Programs Accessories Run.
For Windows
®
10: Right-click the Start button, and then click Run.
2Enter "cmd" in the text box, and then click OK.
A command prompt window opens.
3Enter ipconfig, and then press <Enter> on the keyboard.
4Write down the IP address.
For OS X:
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
1Open System Preferences, and then click Network.
The IP address is displayed under Status.
2Write down the IP address.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Address Book.
Scanning |
233
If a security login dialog box appears, enter user name and password.
NOTE:
•The default user name is "admin," and the default password is left blank (NULL).
3Click the Server Address tab Create of an ID.
The Server Address page appears.
4Enter the information as follows to fill in the fields.
Name Enter a name of your choice. This appears as the name for the Server
Address in the Address Book.
Server Type Select FTP to send documents to an FTP server.
Select SMB to send documents to a shared folder on your computer
using Server Message Block (SMB).
234
| Scanning
5Click Apply New Settings.
Using Address Book Editor
The following procedure uses OS X 10.10 as an example.
NOTE:
•For Windows
®
, you can operate Address Book Editor with using the Tool Box on the Dell Printer
Hub and Dell Print Management Tool. See "Tool Box."
Server Address Enter the name or IP address of the server or computer.
Example:
•For FTP:
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.0.2.1
•For SMB:
Computer name: myhost
IP address: 192.0.2.1
Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder. See "Creating a Shared Folder
(SMB Only)." For SMB only.
•Example: Share, Sharefolder
Server Path Enter the path of the sub-folder within the shared folder. If you have
not created a sub-folder, leave this blank.
When entering the sub-folder path, make sure that the sub-folder is
already created. Do not enter the name of the shared folder.
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic
Enter "MyPic".
If you have created a sub-folder within a sub-folder, separate each
sub-folder name with a backslash (SMB) or forward slash (FTP).
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
•For SMB enter "MyPic\John".
•For FTP enter "MyPic\John".
Server Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the
default value of 21 for FTP or 139 for SMB.
Available ports are:
FTP: 21, 5000 - 65535
SMB: 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
Login Name Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on
your computer or to an FTP server.
•For FTP: Contact your system administrator.
•For SMB: Windows
®
login name that you have specified in "Setting
a User Account (SMB Only)."
Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the above login name.
•For FTP: Contact your system administrator
•For SMB: Empty password is not valid in the Network (Computer)
feature. Make sure that you have a valid password for the user
login account. See "Setting a User Account (SMB Only)."
Re-enter Password Re-enter your password.
Scanning |
235
1Click Finder Applications Dell Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer -
H625cdw/Dell Color Cloud Multifunction Printer - H825cdw/Dell Color Smart
Multifunction Printer - S2825cdn, and then double-click Address Book Editor.
2Perform either of the following:
Click New (Device Address Book) New Server.
Server Address dialog box appears.
3Enter the information as follows to fill in the fields.
Name Enter a name of your choice. This appears as the name for the Server
Address in the Address Book.
Server Type Select Computer to send documents to a shared folder on your
computer using Server Message Block (SMB).
Select Server to send documents to an FTP server.
Server Name/IP Address Enter the name or IP address of the server or computer.
Example:
•For Computer (SMB):
Computer name: myhost
IP address: 192.0.2.1
•For Server (FTP):
Server name: myhost.example.com
(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)
IP address: 192.0.2.1
236
|Scanning
4Click OK.
Sending the Scanned Data on the Network
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Scan to Network Folder.
4Tap the desired address Done.
If the desired address is not displayed, swipe the screen.
5Tap , and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
6Tap Scan.
Share Name Enter the name of the shared folder. See "Creating a Shared Folder
(SMB Only)." For SMB only.
Example: Share, Sharefolder
Path Enter the path of the sub-folder within the shared folder. If you have
not created a sub-folder, leave this blank.
When entering the sub-folder path, make sure that the sub-folder is
already created and do not enter the name of the shared folder.
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic
Enter "MyPic".
If you have created a sub-folder within a sub-folder, separate each
sub-folder name with a backslash (SMB) or forward slash (FTP).
Example:
Shared Folder name: MyShare, Second-level folder name: MyPic,
Third-level folder name: John
•For SMB enter "MyPic\John".
•For FTP enter "MyPic\John".
Login Name Enter the user account name to allow access to a shared folder on
your computer (SMB) or to an FTP server.
•For Computer (SMB): Windows
®
login name that you have
specified in the procedure 1.
•For Server (FTP): Contact your system administrator.
Login Password Enter the password corresponding to the login name.
•For Computer (SMB): Empty password is not valid in the
Network(Computer) feature. Make sure that you have a valid
password for the user login account. See "Setting a User Account
(SMB Only)."
•For Server (FTP): Contact your system administrator.
Confirm Login Password Re-enter your password.
Port Number Enter the Server Port Number. If you are unsure, you can enter the
default value of 139 for Computer (SMB) and 21 for FTP server.
Available ports are:
For Computer (SMB): 139, 445, 5000 - 65535
For Server (FTP): 21, 5000 - 65535
Scanning |
237
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
•If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
•If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
Scanning to a USB Flash Drive
The Scan to USB feature allows you to store scanned data directly to a USB flash drive
attached to the printer without using software.
See "Supported USB Flash Drive."
Procedures
To store the scanned data to a USB flash drive:
NOTE:
•If you insert a USB flash drive to the front USB port first, the USB Drive Detected screen may
appear. In this case, select Scan to USB, and then proceed to step 6.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Insert a USB flash drive into the front USB port of the printer.
4Tap Scan to USB.
5Select a folder to save the scanned data.
See "Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data."
6Tap , and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
7Tap Scan.
CAUTION:
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while the printer is accessing the drive.
The data in the drive may be destroyed, or the drive itself may be damaged and become
unusable.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
•If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
•If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
8Remove the USB flash drive from the printer.
CAUTION:
• Make sure that the printer is not accessing the USB flash drive.
Specifying a Folder to Save the Scanned Data
To save the scanned data to a folder in the USB flash drive, specify the folder before
executing the scan job.
1If folders exist in the USB flash drive, the folder names appear on the touch panel.
238
|Scanning
2Select a folder to save the scanned data.
NOTE:
•The default saving location is the root directory of the USB flash drive.
•You cannot directly enter a folder path using the numeric keypad.
•You can select any folder in the USB flash drive but cannot create a new folder in this step.
You should always create a new folder before connecting the USB flash drive to the printer.
If the name of the scanned data already exists in the folder, the printer generates a
new file name to save the data.
Sending a Scanned Data via E-Mail
You can send the data scanned as an e-mail attachment using the Scan to Email feature.
To send an e-mail, an e-mail account is necessary such as the corporate mail account or
the Internet service provider's mail account. Gmail account can be used as well.
The following are the procedures necessary to setup Scan to E-mail feature:
1"Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail Account"
2"Setting the DNS Server Address"
3"Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server"
Gathering the Necessary Information About Your E-mail
Account
To send an e-mail from the printer, the following information is necessary:
•E-mail account (user account) information
•E-mail sever information
NOTE:
•For details about your e-mail account or the mail server, contact your network administrator or
your Internet service provider.
•When the printer is connected to the network via a proxy server, the printer may not be able to
send the e-mail. In this case, contact your network administrator.
•The following preparations are effective while the e-mail account information is valid. You do not
have to repeat the settings whenever you send the e-mail.
Setting the DNS Server Address
To set the DNS server address to the printer, perform the following procedure:
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings the Print Server Settings tab TCP/IP.
3Perform either of the following:
•If you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer:
Select the Enable check box for Get DNS Server Address from DHCP in DNS.
•If you are setting TCP/IP manually:
Set Manual DNS Server Address in DNS.
4Click Apply New Settings.
Scanning |
239
Setting the Information Necessary to Access the Mail Server
To make the printer to send an e-mail, perform the following procedure:
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click E-Mail Server Settings Overview.
3Set the mail server information as follows:
NOTE:
•In this procedure, the server settings for a Gmail account are used as an example. The server
settings differ for each e-mail service.
•Information about the Gmail account is based on the information as of October 2013. For the
latest information, visit the homepage of Gmail.
aIn the Primary SMTP Gateway text box, set the primary SMTP gateway.
For example: smtp.gmail.com
bIn the SMTP Port Number text box, enter the SMTP port number.
This must be 25, 587 or between 5000 and 65535.
For example: 587
cIn the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, specify the authentication
method for outgoing e-mail.
For example: SMTP_Auth (Auto)
dIn the SMTP Login User text box, set the SMTP login user.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate them
using commas.
For example: aaaa@gmail.com
NOTE:
•It is not recommended to share a personal e-mail account with the Scan to Email function
of the printer. Instead, use an e-mail account dedicated to Scan to Email function.
eIn the SMTP Login Password text box, set the SMTP account password.
240
|Scanning
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters can be used.
fIn the Re-enter SMTP Login Password text box, enter the login password again
to check it.
gPerform either of the following:
•If you have selected other than POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP
(APOP) in the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, proceed to
step h.
•If you have selected POP before SMTP (Plain) or POP before SMTP (APOP) in
the E-Mail Send Authentication drop-down list box, enter the following:
–In the POP3 Server Address text box, enter the POP3 server address in IP
address format of aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd or as a DNS host name using up to 63
characters.
–In the POP3 Port Number text box, enter the POP3 server port number.
This must be 110 or between 5000 and 65535.
–In the POP User Name text box, set the POP3 account user name.
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters, periods, hyphens, underscores, and at
symbols (@) can be used. If specifying more than one address, separate
them using commas.
–In the POP User Password text box, enter the POP3 account password.
Up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
–In the Re-enter POP User Password text box, enter the POP user password
again to check it.
hIn the Reply Address text box, enter the reply e-mail address sent with each
E-Mail Alert.
4Click Apply New Settings.
•If SSL/TLS is not used or if Invalid, POP before SMTP (Plain), or POP before SMTP
(APOP) is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication, the mail server settings are
complete.
•If SMTP authentication is selected for E-Mail Send Authentication and if SSL/TLS
encryption is used to communicate with the SMTP sever, the SSL/TLS type must
be set in SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.
Proceed to step 5.
NOTE:
•To send an e-mail through Gmail, set the SSL/TLS type to STARTTLS in SMTP-SSL/TLS
Communication of SSL/TLS under the Security tab.
5Click the Security tab SSL/TLS.
6Select a SSL/TLS type from the SMTP-SSL/TLS Communication list.
NOTE:
•To use a Gmail account, select STARTTLS.
7Click Apply New Settings.
Registering a Destination E-Mail Address to Address Book
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
Scanning |
241
2Click Address Book E-Mail Address tab Create of an ID.
The E-Mail Address page for registering a new e-mail address appears.
3Enter the following:
•Name
•Address
4Click Apply New Settings.
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Scan to Email.
3Specify a recipient by either of the following:
•If you want to enter an e-mail address directly:
aTap the Enter Recipient's Address text box.
bEnter the address using the keyboard.
cTap Done.
You can remove or edit the recipient by tapping + and the recipient you specified.
•If you want to select from the following types of address books:
aTap Address Book.
bSelect a recipient from either of the following:
–Tap Individuals to select an e-mail address registered in the address
book.
–Tap Groups to select a group of e-mails registered in the address book.
–Tap Network Address Book to search an e-mail address from the LDAP
server address book.
See "Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server
Address Book."
cTap Done.
242
|Scanning
You can remove or see details of the recipient, or set the e-mail as Bcc by tapping
+ and the recipient you specified.
4Tap Sender, and then specify the sender's e-mail address by either of the following:
•If you want to enter an e-mail address directly:
aTap Keyboard.
bEnter the address using the keyboard.
cTap Done.
•If you want to select from the address book:
aTap Address Book.
bSelect an e-mail address registered in the address book.
cTap Done.
•If you want to select from the server address book:
See "Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail Server Address
Book."
NOTE:
•For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
•For details about Network Address Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
•E-mail addresses need to be registered before you can select Address Book.
5Tap , and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Scan Settings."
6Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you to
scan another page.
•If you want to scan another page, place the document, and then tap Continue.
•If you are finished scanning, tap Done.
Managing the Scanner
You can connect the specified scanner, and set the password for the scanner.
Port Settings
When the printer is connected to the computer directly by a USB cable, select USB.
When the printer is connected to the network, select Network. Enter the IP address of
the printer in the IP Address text box, and then click OK.
When the Printer is Connected to the Network
When you are using DHCP for TCP/IP setting for the printer, the image capturing
software may not find the scanner occasionally due to the change of the IP address
allocated for the printer. In this case, check the IP address of the printer, and then
connect the scanner by specifying the IP address.
On Windows
®
, you can check the IP address of the printer using the Dell Printer Hub or
Dell Print Management Tool. Open Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool, and
then click Printer information.
Scanning |
243
Searching the Scanner
In the Port Settings tab, you can search the scanners from the network and select the
desired one from the detected scanners.
Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows
®
only)
Password Settings
In the Password Settings tab, you can input the password that is set for your scanner to
access from your computer to the printer.
For Windows
®
:
For OS X:
Search all scanners from the
network (Windows
®
only)
Select to search scanners in your network.
Scanner List Displays a list of detected scanners.
Search again Click to search the scanners in your network.
Search Criteria (Windows
®
only) Click to display the Search Criteria dialog box for setting the search
condition. See "Search Criteria Dialog Box (Windows
®
only)."
Subnet Address Enter the subnet address.
•IPv4: Broadcast Address such as 192.0.2.1
•IPv6: Multicast Address such as 2001:db8::
Search Time Specify a time period for searching a scanner.
Community Name Enter the SNMPv1/v2 community name. The default community
name is "public."
244
|Scanning
Changing the Default Scan Setting
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Default Settings Scan Defaults.
3Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
4Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
Password for Scanner Enter the password.
Faxing |
245
Faxing
NOTE:
•If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function. If the Functions Control setting is set to Off, the function is disabled
and the menu is grayed out. See "Functions Control."
Initial Settings
To use the fax function, you need to perform the initial settings.
If you have already performed the initial settings for fax when you first turned on the
printer, you can skip this procedure. See "Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel."
If you have not performed the initial settings for fax, you can perform initial settings using
the Dell Printer Easy Install or Operator Panel.
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Dell Printer Easy
Install
1Insert the Software and Documentation disc into your computer.
The Dell Printer Easy Install program starts.
2Click Main Menu.
3Click Change.
The Configure Printer screen appears.
246
|Faxing
4Click Configure the Fax settings Next.
5Follow the on-screen instruction.
Specifying the Fax Initial Settings Using the Operator Panel
To set the fax settings manually from the operator panel, set the following menus.
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
•If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password when entering Admin Settings.
See "Panel Lock."
•Fax Number, Country, Fax Header Name, and Line Type:
From the (Information) button Tools tab Admin Settings Fax
Settings Fax Line Settings
If you use DRPD option, you can set DRPD Pattern here.
NOTE:
•When you configure the country setting, the settings relevant to it is initialized.
•Receive Mode:
From the (Information) button Tools tab Admin Settings Fax
Settings Incoming Defaults
•Tone / Pulse:
From the (Information) button Tools tab Admin Settings Fax
Settings Transmission Defaults
For details about each menu, see "Fax Settings."
Changing the Fax Settings
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the desired menu.
4Select the desired setting or specify a value.
To specify a value, tap – or +, or use the number pad or the keyboard.
5Tap OK.
6Repeat steps 3 to 5 as needed.
For available options, see "Fax Settings."
Sending a Fax
You can fax data from the printer. You can also directly fax data transferred from a
computer running a Microsoft
®
Windows
®
operating system or a Macintosh computer.
Sending a Fax From Memory
1Load the document(s).
Faxing |
247
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax.
4Tap , and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
5Enter or select a fax number by performing either of the following:
•If you want to enter a fax number directly:
aTap the Enter Number text box.
bEnter the number using the keyboard.
cTap Done.
•If you want to select from the phone book:
aTap Phone Book.
–Tap Individuals to select an individual fax number.
–Tap Groups to select a group dial number.
–Tap Network Phone Book to search and select a fax number from the
LDAP server.
See "Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book."
bTap Done.
NOTE:
•For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
•For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
•The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Address Book.
•If you want to select from the speed dial:
aTap Speed Dial.
bEnter the speed dial number using the number pad.
cTap Done.
You can add more fax numbers by tapping +.
6Tap Send.
NOTE:
•To cancel the fax job, tap Stop at any time while sending the fax.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
The printer starts dialing the number, and then sends the fax when the remote fax
machine is ready.
248
|Faxing
Sending a Fax Manually
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax.
4Tap , and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
5Tap On Hook.
6Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.
You can also select the recipient by using speed dial number or address book. See
"Automatic Dialing."
7Tap Send.
NOTE:
•To cancel the fax job, tap Stop at any time while sending the fax.
•Tapping Send does not start sending a fax when the available time is set or the Fax function is
locked. For details about the available time and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and
"Functions Control."
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and
returns to the standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the touch
panel.
If you receive an error message, tap Close to clear the message and send the document
again.
You can set the printer to print a confirmation report after each fax transmission. See
"Fax Transmit."
Automatic Redialing
If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the
printer redials the number every minute based on the number set in the redial settings.
For details about how to change the time interval between redials and the number of
redial attempts, see "Fax Settings."
NOTE:
•The printer does not redial a number when you send a fax manually.
Faxing |
249
Sending a Delayed Fax
The Delayed Start mode can be used to save scanned data for transmission at a specified
time to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
Once Delayed Start mode is activated, the printer stores all of the documents to be faxed
into its memory and sends them at the specified time.
After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete, the data in the memory is cleared.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax.
4Tap , and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
5In the Fax Settings screen, tap Delayed Send.
6Select the On check box.
7Specify the start time by tapping – or +, and then tap OK.
8Tap Back.
9Enter the fax number of the recipient using the number pad.
You can also select the recipient using speed dial number or address book. See
"Automatic Redialing."
10 Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Scanning starts and the data is stored in the memory to be sent at the specified time.
NOTE:
•If you restart the printer, the stored documents are sent as soon as the printer is activated.
•If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax
function, the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. For details about the
available time and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and "Functions Control."
Sending a Fax Directly From a Computer
You can send a fax directly from your computer using the driver.
NOTE:
•Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax.
•If the specified start time overlaps with the time periods for the available time or the Fax function,
the printer cannot send the delayed fax at the specified time. For details about the available time
and the Fax function, see "Set Available Time" and "Functions Control."
250
|Faxing
Overview
The following images use Dell H825cdw as examples.
Procedure
NOTE:
•The names of the dialog boxes and the buttons may be different from those given in the following
procedure depending on the program you are using.
•To use this feature, you must install the fax driver. For Windows
®
, see "Installing the Software for
Windows
®
Computers." For OS X, see "Installing the Software and Print Drivers."
The following procedure uses Dell H825cdw as an example.
1Open the file you want to fax.
2Open the print dialog box from the program.
3Click Dell Color MFP H825cdw Fax Preferences for Windows
®
or FAX Setting for
OS X.
For Windows
®
:
For OS X:
Send fax
Receiving machine
(fax machine/
multifunction printer)
Send data
Dell Color MFP
H825cdw Fax driver
Sending machine
(this printer)
Faxing |
251
4Specify the following settings.
NOTE:
•The settings made here are only applied to a single fax job.
For Windows
®
:
For OS X:
Transmission image quality Select the output quality.
•Standard: For documents with normal sized characters.
• High Quality: For documents containing small characters or
thin lines or documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.
• Super-high image quality: For documents containing
extremely fine detail. The super fine mode is enabled only if the
remote machine also supports Super Fine resolution.
NOTE:
•Faxes printed in the Super-high image quality by Direct
Fax driver transmits at the highest resolution supported by
the receiving device.
252
|Faxing
5Perform either of the following:
•For Windows
®
: Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box, and then
click Print.
•For OS X: Click Print.
The Recipient Setting dialog box for Windows
®
or the Set/Check Fax Transmission
dialog box for OS X appears.
6Enter the destination for the recipient by performing the following.
For details about how to enter the destination, refer to the Help of the driver.
For Windows
®
:
Transmission report Specify whether to print a fax transmission result.
• Output regularly: Prints a transmission result after every fax
transmission.
• Output for non-transmission: Prints a transmission result only
when an error occurs.
• Do not output: Does not print fax transmission results.
Fax Cover Page Specify whether to attach a cover page to your fax.
• According to Printer Settings: Determines whether to attach a
cover page to your fax in accordance with the setting you
specify in Fax Cover Page on the operator panel.
•Attach: Attaches a cover page to your fax.
•None: Does not attach a cover page to your fax.
Sender Specify whether to print the sender's name on the fax cover
page.
• According to Printer Settings: Determines whether or not to
print the sender's name on the fax cover page based on the
printer settings.
• Enter a sender name: Allows you to enter a sender's name to
be printed on the fax cover page in Sender Name.
Sender Name Enter a sender's name to be printed on the fax cover page.
The sender's name can be up to 30 characters. If it exceeds 30
characters, only the first 30 characters are printed.
Faxing |
253
For OS X:
•Enter the name and fax number directly.
•Select a fax number from a phone book:
NOTE:
•When you are using Mac OS X 10.7 or later, you cannot use Look Up Device Data feature on
some programs.
•Enter the password in the Password text box in the Authorization area before sending a fax if
the fax function is locked with a password.
•If the Functions Control setting is set to On (Password), you need to enter the four-digit
password to use the function.
Look Up Phone Book Select from a list of fax numbers saved in the file specified for My
Phone Book file.
Look Up Device Data Select from a list of fax numbers saved in the Phone Book on the
printer.
Import and add file
(Windows
®
only)
Select a source file such as a CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, or a LDAP
server. See "LDAP Server" and "Fax Server Phone Book."
254
|Faxing
7Click Start Sending.
Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 200 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations (001–200).
When the speed dial job specified in the delayed fax or redial exists, you cannot change
the speed dial number from the operator panel or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Setting Speed Dial
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Individuals.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the
screen.
To jump to a specific speed dial number, enter the desired number and then # using
the number pad.
If a speed dial number is already set, the screen shows the name and the number of
entries.
4Tap the Enter Name text box.
5Enter the name, and then tap OK.
6Tap the Enter Number text box.
7Enter the fax number using the number pad, and then tap OK.
To insert a pause between numbers, press the (Redial/Pause) button.
"-" appears on the touch panel.
8Tap OK.
9Repeat steps 3 to 8 as needed.
Editing Speed Dial
You can edit or delete a speed dial number.
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Individuals.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the
screen.
4Perform the following:
•To edit a speed dial number:
Faxing |
255
aTap Edit the Name or Fax Number text box.
bEnter a new name or a fax number, and then tap OK.
•To delete a speed dial number:
Tap Remove Delete.
5Repeat steps 3 to 4 as needed.
Sending a Fax Using Speed Dial
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax Speed Dial.
4Enter the speed dial number using the number pad, and then tap Done.
NOTE:
•Using the asterisk (*) in the first digit, you can send a document to multiple locations. For
example, if you enter 00*, you can send a document to the locations registered between 001
and 009.
5Tap , and then check and change the fax settings.
See "Fax Settings."
6Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
The fax number stored in the speed dial location is dialed. The document is sent when
the remote fax machine answers.
Group Dialing
If you frequently send a document to several destinations, you can create a group of
these destinations and set them under a one-digit group dial location. This enables you
to use a group dial number setting to send the same document to all the destinations in
the group.
NOTE:
•You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial number.
Setting Group Dial
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Groups.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the desired group dial number.
If the desired group dial number is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the
screen.
256
|Faxing
If a group dial number is already set, the screen shows the name and the number of
entries stored in that group dial number.
4Tap the Enter Group Name text box.
5Enter the name, and then tap OK.
6Tap Add from Address Book.
NOTE:
•The fax number needs to be registered before you can select Add from Address Book.
7Select the desired speed dial number.
If the desired speed dial number is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the
screen.
8Tap OK.
9Repeat steps 3 to 8 as needed.
Editing Group Dial
You can delete a specific speed dial number from a selected group or add a new number
to the selected group.
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Phone Book Groups.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Select the desired group dial number.
If the desired group dial number is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the
screen.
4Perform the following:
•To edit a speed dial number:
aTap Edit Enter Group Name text box.
bEnter a new name, and then tap OK.
•To delete a speed dial number from the group dial number:
Tap Remove.
5Repeat steps 3 to 4 as needed.
Sending a Fax Using Group Dial (Multi-address Transmission)
You can use group dialing for Broadcasting or Delayed transmissions.
Follow the procedure of the desired operation. See "Delayed Send."
You can use one or more group numbers in one operation. Then continue the
procedure to complete the desired operation.
The printer scans the document loaded in the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
(DADF) or on the document glass into the memory. The printer dials each of the
numbers included in the group.
Printing a Speed Dial List
You can check your automatic dial setting by printing a Speed Dial list.
Faxing |
257
See "Report / List."
Phone Book
You can select or search the registered phone numbers from the phone books.
1Load the document(s).
See "Loading Documents."
2Press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax Phone Book.
4Specify the recipient by performing either of the following:
•If you want to select from the local phone book:
aTap Individuals or Groups.
bSelect the desired speed dial number or the group dial number.
If the desired number is not displayed, swipe the screen.
cTap Done.
•If you want to search from the server phone book:
aTap Network Phone Book.
bEnter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
cTap a recipient from the search result Done.
NOTE:
•For details about address book and server address book, see "Using the Address Book and
Phone Book."
•For details about Network Phone Book, see "Using the Server Address Book and Server
Phone Book."
•A fax number needs to be registered before you can select an address book.
5Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to place a new document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Receiving a Fax
NOTE:
•To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, connect an answering machine to
the phone connector on the rear of the printer. See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering
Machine."
When the memory is full, the fax is received in the Telephone mode.
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are
printing, faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-sized,
A4-sized, or Legal-sized paper. See "Loading Print Media" and "Print Media Guidelines."
258
|Faxing
Receiving a Fax Automatically
To automatically receive a fax, use the Fax, Telephone / Fax, or Ans Machine/Fax
mode. The default setting is Fax mode. See "Receive Mode."
NOTE:
•To use the Telephone / Fax or Ans Machine/Fax mode, you must connect an external
telephone to the phone connector on the rear of the printer. See "Connecting a Telephone or
Answering Machine."
Receiving a Fax Manually
When in the Telephone or Telephone / Fax mode, you can receive the fax manually.
See "Receive Mode."
Using Remote Receive
Use Remote Receive to manually receive a fax from an external telephone without
having to go to the printer.
To manually receive a fax using the external telephone, you must connect an external
telephone to the phone connector on the rear of the printer and also set Remote
Receive to On. See "Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine."
When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear a fax tone, enter the remote
receive code from the external telephone.
NOTE:
•When entering the remote receive code from the external telephone, press the number keys slowly
in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine, try entering the two-digit code
again.
•The default remote receive code is 00. You can change the two-digit code to a number of your
choice. See "Receive Mode."
•Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF.
Using Manual Receive in On Hook
You can manually receive a fax by tapping Manual Receive in On Hook on the touch
panel.
1When the external telephone rings, pick up the handset.
2Make sure that you hear the fax tone, and then press the (Home) button.
3Tap Fax On Hook Receive Receive.
4Hang up the hand set of the external telephone.
The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to the standby mode when the reception is
completed.
Receiving Faxes Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection
(DRPD)
The DRPD is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone
line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number someone
uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, which consist of various
combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Faxing |
259
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must
be installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection, you need another telephone line at your location, or someone
available to dial your fax number from outside.
To set up the DRPD:
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Tool Box or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Tool
Box" or "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Line
Settings.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap until DRPD Pattern appears, and then tap DRPD Pattern.
4Select the desired pattern, and then tap OK.
NOTE:
•The printer provides seven DRPD patterns. If this service is available from your telephone
company, ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service.
5Turn off the printer, and then turn it on again to apply the settings.
To receive faxes in the DRPD, you need to set the menu to DRPD. See "Receive Mode."
Receiving Faxes in the Secure Receiving Mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized
people. To restrict printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended,
turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option. In the secure fax mode,
all incoming faxes is stored in memory. When the mode is turned off, all stored faxes are
printed.
NOTE:
•To turn on the secure fax mode, Panel Lock Control must be set to Enable.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer
Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Admin Settings Fax Settings Incoming
Defaults.
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap until Secure Receive appears, and then tap Secure Receive.
4Tap Secure Receive Set Enable.
5Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK.
When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, the printer stores it into memory
and Secure Fax Receive is enabled on the Print screen to let you know that there is
a fax stored.
260
|Faxing
To print received documents:
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Print.
3Swipe the screen until Secure Fax Receive appears, and then tap Secure Fax
Receive.
4Enter a four-digit password, and then tap OK.
The faxes stored in memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1Follow the same steps 1 to 3 in "To turn the secure receiving mode on:."
2Tap Secure Receive Set Disable.
Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since the printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you are making
copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper
or toner, the printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. And then, as soon as you
finish copying, printing, or re-supply the consumables, the printer starts printing the fax.
Polling Receive
You can receive faxes from the remote fax machine when you want to receive it.
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Fax On Hook Polling.
3Enter the fax number of the remote machine using the number pad.
4Tap Receive.
Reports Related to Fax
The following reports may be useful when using fax:
NOTE:
•For details about other reports and how to print a report, see "Report / List."
Speed Dial This list shows all the numbers currently stored in the memory of the
printer as speed dial numbers.
Address Book This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the printer's
memory as Address Book information.
Server Address This list shows all of the numbers currently stored in the printer's
memory as Server Address information.
Fax Activity This report shows information about the faxes you recently received
or sent.
Fax Pending This list shows the status of pending faxes. You may print this list to
check your changes after changing any settings.
Print Meter This report shows the total number of pages printed. The report is
titled as Print Volume Report or ColorTrack Report, depending on
the ColorTrack Mode setting.
Faxing |
261
Changing the Default Fax Setting
NOTE:
•You can set the same setting using the Tool Box or Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Tool
Box" or "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
1Press the (Information) button.
2Tap the Tools tab Default Settings Fax Defaults.
3Select the desired menu item.
If the desired menu item is not displayed, tap or to scroll through the screen.
4Select the desired setting or enter the value, and then tap OK.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed.
262
| Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
The Dell Document Hub is a convenient one-stop gateway to a variety of cloud services
to help you manage your documents. With the Dell Document Hub, you can convert
hard copy documents into editable digital content and store them directly in your
preferred cloud storage service. You can search for files across multiple clouds
simultaneously and then share and print content easily.
NOTE:
•Dell Document Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Registering the User and Signing In to the Dell
Document Hub
To use the Dell Document Hub, you need a user account registered to the printer, and
sign in to the Dell Document Hub.
Registering a New User to the Dell Document Hub
Prepare the access information required for each of the cloud services you want to use,
and then make sure that you have a user account registered to the printer. See "Creating
a New User Account."
To Register a New User From a Computer
1Access the Dell Document Hub website from your computer by entering the
following URL in the web browser:
www.dell.com/dochub
2Follow the on-screen instruction.
An e-mail is sent to the registered e-mail address.
3Check the e-mail and follow the instructions on the e-mail to activate.
To Register a New User From the Printer
You can start the user registration alternatively using the printer.
NOTE:
•To complete the registration process, you need a computer or mobile device to receive an e-mail
and access the Dell Document Hub website.
1Log in to the printer as a registered user.
2In the Home screen, tap Dell Document Hub New User Next.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) |
263
3Follow the on-screen instruction.
Signing In to the Dell Document Hub
1Log in to the printer as a registered user.
2In the Home screen, tap Dell Document Hub.
The Dell Doc Hub Sign In screen is displayed.
3Tap the E-mail text box, and then enter the e-mail address.
NOTE:
•You can also tap to select a recently entered e-mail address from a list. The list can
contain up to eight recently entered e-mail addresses.
4Tap the Password text box, enter the password, and then tap Done.
If you want to save your e-mail address and password, select the Save E-mail &
Password check box.
NOTE:
•The e-mail address and password are stored in the printer under your user account of the
printer. For security purpose, it is recommended that you protect your user account of the
printer with a password. If your user account is not protected with a password, unauthorized
users may login to your user account of the printer, and then access your documents in the
cloud services through the Dell Document Hub.
5Tap Sign in.
NOTE:
•If all the tiles on the Dell Document Hub screen are pale and disabled when you sign in, you have
not completed the necessary procedures to activate your account of the Dell Document Hub.
Check the e-mail you received from the Dell Document Hub, and then activate your account.
Icons for the Dell Document Hub Screens
1
2
3
4
65 7
8
264
| Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
When the Favorite List Screen Is Displayed When You Tap the Tile
on the Dell Document Hub Screen
This means that your favorite settings for functions have been saved on the printer.
Select the desired setting from the list, or tap Skip to continue the procedure.
Returning to the Home Screen
Tap Back or press the (Home) button.
NOTE:
•When you return to the Home screen by tapping Back or by pressing the (Home) button,
sign-in status is maintained.
Next time you tap Dell Document Hub on the Home screen, you do not have to sign in while you
are logged in to the Home screen.
•You can tap Sign out as well to return to the Home screen, but the sign-in status is not
maintained. Next time you sign in to the Dell Document Hub, you need to re-enter your e-mail
address and password.
Logging Out From the Printer
Press the (Log In/Out) button to log out from the Home screen and to display the
portal screen.
NOTE:
•When you log out using the (Log In/Out) button, the sign-in status to the Dell Document
Hub is maintained as far as the Save E-mail & Password check box is selected in the step 5 in
"Signing In to the Dell Document Hub." Next time you tap Dell Document Hub on the Home
screen, you can skip the sign in process.
Searching for and Printing Files
You can search for the files saved in the cloud services, and print them from the printer.
You can search across multiple cloud services at once. This method is suitable when you
1 Indicates that the cloud service is correctly associated with the Dell Document Hub.
Tap to display more information.
2 Indicates that the cloud service is not associated, or not linked correctly.
Visit www.dell.com/dochub to link it again.
Tap to display more information.
3 Indicates that the cloud service link with the Dell Document Hub has expired.
Visit www.dell.com/dochub to link it again.
Tap to display more information.
4 Tap to search for files in the current folder and subfolders (if any) from the selected cloud
service. This is displayed when you select Scan or Smart OCR Scan.
5 Tap to sort the results in ascending, descending, or by cloud services order.
6 Tap to change print, scan or e-mail settings.
7 Tap to preview the selected files, up to the first three pages of each file.
8 Tap to save print, scan, e-mail settings or folder as Favorite.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) |
265
want to search by the keywords, including the file name.
NOTE:
•To search for files across multiple cloud services, visit www.dell.com/dochub and connect the
cloud services with the Dell Document Hub.
•This feature is enabled only when your printer still has the black toner, and the waste toner box is
not full.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Search for Files.
2Enter the keywords, and then tap Search.
Files are searched across multiple cloud services you registered.
3Tap the files you want to print.
NOTE:
•If the desired file is not displayed, swipe the screen.
•You can select up to 10 files.
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
4Tap , and then preview the selected files.
The first three pages of each file are displayed in the small previews of the File
Preview screen.
•To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.
•To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.
•To specify the file as the one to be printed, select the check box at the upper-left
corner beside the small previews.
•To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
5Tap , and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
6Tap Print.
NOTE:
•To cancel printing, tap Stop.
•You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of Search Results, File Preview or
Print Settings.
Browsing and Printing Files
You can browse and print the files saved in the selected cloud services. This method is
suitable when you know which cloud service the file you want to print is located in.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Browse for Files.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
266
| Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
To link the cloud service with the Dell Document Hub, visit
www.dell.com/dochub.
2Tap the cloud service you want to browse in.
NOTE:
•If the desired cloud service is not displayed, swipe the screen.
3Select the file you want to print by performing either of the following:
•Tap the location you want to browse in and the file you want to print.
NOTE:
•If the desired location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
•Search the files in the selected cloud service.
aTap .
bEnter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
cTap Back to return to the previous screen.
NOTE:
•You can select up to 10 files.
4Tap , and then preview the selected files.
NOTE:
•On the File Preview screen, the first three pages of each file are displayed.
•To show the page in the large preview, tap the page in the small previews.
•To preview other files, flick the screen side to side.
•To specify the file as the one to be printed, select the check box at the upper-left corner
beside the small previews.
•To return to the previous screen, tap Back.
5Tap , and then check and change the print settings.
See "Print Settings."
NOTE:
•You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1Tap in the Print Settings screen.
2Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
•If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
•You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping .
•Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) |
267
6Tap Print.
NOTE:
•To cancel printing, tap Stop.
•You can start printing by tapping Print in any screens of contents list, Search Results, File
Preview, or Print Settings.
Scanning
You can scan the document and save the scanned data in the cloud service.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Scan.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
2Select the destination you want to save the scanned data to by performing either of
the following:
•Tap a cloud service you want to save the scanned data to, and then perform
either of the following:
–Tap the location you want to save the scanned data to.
NOTE:
•If the location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
–Search the files in the selected cloud service.
aTap .
bEnter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
cTap Back to return to the previous screen.
•Search the files across multiple cloud services.
aTap .
bEnter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
cTap Back to return to the previous screen.
3Tap Next.
4Tap the File Name text box, and then enter the file name.
5Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
6Tap , and then check and change the scan settings.
268
| Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
See "Scan Settings."
NOTE:
•You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1Tap in the Scan Settings screen.
2Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
•If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
•You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping .
•Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
7Tap Scan.
NOTE:
•To cancel scanning, tap Stop.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Scanning the Document Using Optical Character
Recognition (OCR)
You can scan the document using OCR, and save it in the cloud service.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Smart OCR Scan.
The Cloud Services screen is displayed.
2Select the destination you want to save the converted file to by performing either of
the following:
•Tap a cloud service you want to save the converted file to, and then perform
either of the following:
–Tap the location you want to save the converted file to.
NOTE:
•If the location is not displayed, swipe the screen.
–Search the files in the selected cloud service.
aTap .
bEnter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only) |
269
cTap Back to return to the previous screen.
•Search the files across multiple cloud services.
aTap .
bEnter the file name or keywords, and then tap Search.
NOTE:
•You can sort the results by tapping and selecting the sorting order.
cTap Back to return to the previous screen.
3Tap Next.
4Tap the File Name text box, and then enter the file name.
5Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
6Tap , and then check and change the scan settings.
See "Smart OCR Scan" and "Scan Settings.”
NOTE:
•You can save your print settings and file path to the cloud service as a favorite.
1Tap in the Scan Settings screen.
2Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
•If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
•You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping .
•Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
7Tap Scan.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Sending the Scanned Data to Yourself via E-Mail
The document can be scanned and sent to you as an attached file of an e-mail.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap E-mail Me.
The E-mail Me screen is displayed.
2Tap the File Format box, and then select a file format.
3Tap the Subject text box, and then enter the subject of the mail sent with the
scanned data.
270
| Dell™ Document Hub (Windows
®
Only)
4Tap , and then check and change the e-mail settings.
See "E-mail Me" and "Scan Settings."
NOTE:
•You can save your e-mail settings to the cloud service as a favorite.
1Tap in the E-mail Settings screen.
2Name your favorite in the Save Favorite screen, and then tap Save.
•If you choose a name for a favorite that is the same as an existing favorite, the settings and the
file path will be overwritten.
•You can delete an unnecessary favorite by tapping .
•Once you save your settings as a favorite, you can recall those settings the next time you sign
in to the Dell Document Hub from any printer of the same model.
5Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
Sending a Scanned Data of a Business Card to Yourself
via E-Mail
Business cards can be scanned and converted to vCard files, and sent to you as an
attached file of an e-mail.
1In the Dell Document Hub screen, tap Business Card Reader.
The Business Card Reader screen is displayed.
2Tap the Subject text box, and then enter the subject of the e-mail sent with the
vCard file.
3Tap , and then check and change the e-mail settings.
aTap OCR Language, and then select a language.
bTap Back to return to the previous screen.
4Tap Send.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the screen prompts you for
another page.
•If you want to scan another document, replace the document with a new
document, and then tap Continue.
•When you have finished loading documents, tap Done.
|
271
5
Know Your Printer
Understanding the Software of Your Printer 272
User Authentication 286
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization 290
Using the Address Book and Phone Book 292
Using Digital Certificates 298
Understanding Printer Messages 307
Specifications 317
272
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Overview
Use the Software and Documentation disc to install a combination of software
programs.
( : supported, Blank: not supported)
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool
NOTE:
•Dell Printer Hub is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•Dell Print Management Tool is available on Dell S2825cdn.
•It is supported on only Windows
®
7 or later.
This software consolidates your printer management, monitoring tools and cloud
connectivity.
You can conveniently access printer utilities, advanced scan features and
printer/consumables details, and receive notifications on driver/software updates as well
as printer status.
To launch the Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool, click Start All Programs
Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool.
The Dell Printer Hub and Dell Print Management Tool have the following software and
directories:
•Address Book Editor
See "Address Book Editor."
•Tool Box
See "Tool Box."
•Printer Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Displays the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration
Web Tool."
•Configuration tool
•App Manager
See "App Manager."
Item Windows
®
OS X Linux
Dell Printer Hub/Dell Print Management Tool
Printer Status Window
Status Monitor Console
Status Monitor Widget
Tool Box
Address Book Editor
ScanButton Manager
Dell™ Supplies Management System
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
App Manager
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
273
See the FAQ on the Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print Management Tool.
Printer Status Window
The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or an error such as paper
jams and low toner.
By default, the Printer Status window opens only when an error occur. When an error
occur, the error message appears on the Printer Status window. You can set the Printer
Status window to always stay open when printing in Printing Status Window Properties.
You can also check the toner level, quantity of paper remaining or configuration of the
options for the printer.
See the help on the Printer Status window.
Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget
Use the Status Monitor Console/Status Monitor Widget to manage multiple instances of
the Status Window for a particular printer.
To start the Status Monitor Console, select a printer from the list view or Printer
Selection, and then click the name of the printer to open the Status Window for that
particular printer.
For OS X, see "Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh."
For Linux, see "Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux."
Tool Box
The Tool Box allows you to view, specify, and diagnose the system settings. See the help
on the Tool Box.
Address Book Editor
The Address Book Editor allows you to register the contact information such as phone
number and e-mail address. See "Using Address Book Editor."
Dell™ Supplies Management System
You can use the Dell Supplies Management System to order consumables online or by
phone from Dell.
See "Using the Dell Supplies Management System."
User Setup Disk Creating Tool
The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program is used to create driver installation packages
that contain custom driver settings. The User Setup Disk Creating Tool program is
located in the MakeDisk folder of the Utilities folder on the Software and
Documentation disc. The print drivers that are used are also located on the Software and
Documentation disc. A driver installation package can contain a group of saved print
driver settings and other data for things such as:
•Print orientation and Multiple Up
•Watermarks
•Font references
If you want to install the print driver with the same settings on multiple computers
274
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
running the same operating system, create a setup disk in a media or in a server on the
network. Using the setup disk that you have created reduces the amount of work
required when installing the print driver.
•Install the print driver in the computer on which the setup disk is to be created.
•The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was
created or computers running the same operating system. Create a separate setup
disk for each of the operating systems.
App Manager
The App Manager is a utility that lets you manage the apps on the printer.
NOTE:
•App Manager is supported only on Windows
®
7 or later.
The following tasks can be performed from the App Manager:
•Install, update, and uninstall apps
•Backup and restore printer settings, address books, and apps
CAUTION:
• Do not turn off the printer or the computer while backing up or restoring data.
NOTE:
•The App Manager can backup the data of 10 printers. For each printer, up to five backup history
can be cached.
•The following are not included in the backup data:
- Settings data of Default Settings, Network Settings, Fax Settings, Maintenance, Secure Settings,
and USB Settings
- Data that is integral with other setting data such as digital certificates
- Data that is specific to the printer such as an IP address
- Data that is not permitted to be backed up due to security reasons
- Settings about date and time, and also settings that are associated with date and time
- Data that are considered invalid for settings of the printer
•The time to send and create backup files may take longer depending on the data size.
•The features of the App Manager may not be used when the printer has an error. If the App
Manager does not respond, check and clear the status of the printer.
Preparing to Use the App Manager
To use the App Manager, it is recommended for your computer to have more than 25GB
of storage space.
NOTE:
•Your computer needs to be connected to a network. USB connection is not supported.
•.Net Framework4.0 or later is required.
Using the App Manager
The following procedure uses Windows
®
7/Windows
®
10 as an example.
1Click Start All Programs Dell Printers Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print
Management Tool.
For Windows
®
10: Click the Start button Dell Printer Hub or Dell Print
Management Tool.
2Click Printers.
3Click Add Printer.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
275
4Find the printer you want to register and click Add.
NOTE:
•If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list, enter the IP address of the printer
in the search text box.
5Enter the same ID and password that is used for the Dell Printer Configuration Web
Tool, and then click OK.
6Click .
The screen returns to the printer list.
7Click the printer you want to manage from the list.
NOTE:
•If the printer you are looking for does not appear in the list or cannot be accessed from the App
Manager, check that On is selected for the check boxes of Port9100 and SNMP in the Dell Printer
Configuration Web Tool Print Server Settings tab Port Settings.
Using the Status Monitor Widget for Macintosh
Status Monitor Widget is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer
through the exchange of information between the Macintosh and the printer.
Status Monitor Widget
•Monitoring Dell Printers
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your
Macintosh
•Receiving Alerts
Alerts you when there is a problem, such as paper jams or low toner
•Ordering Supplies
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies
Before Installing the Status Monitor Widget
Operating Systems
•Mac OS X 10.7
•OS X 10.8
•OS X 10.9
•OS X 10.10
Network Protocols and Interfaces
•LPR
•Socket 9100
•Bonjour
•USB 2.0 and 1.1 (When connecting with multiple printers of the same model via USB
cables, only the printer recognized first can be monitored in the Status Monitor
Widget.)
276
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Installing the Status Monitor Widget
1Double-click the Dell Color MFP H625cdw/Dell Color MFP H825cdw/Dell Color
MFP S2825cdn icon in the Finder window.
2Follow the on-screen instructions.
When the Install Succeeded screen appears, the installation is complete.
NOTE:
•Entering the administrative login name and password are required during the installation
process.
Opening and Closing the Status Monitor Widget
Opening the Status Monitor Widget
1Click the Dashboard icon in the Dock.
2Click the Plus (+) sign.
3Click the icon of Status Monitor in the Widget Bar.
NOTE:
•If the message Select a printer is displayed, select the printer in Preferences. See
"Preferences."
Closing the Status Monitor Widget
Click the Close (x) button in the upper-left corner of the Printer Status window.
Printer Status Window
When the Status Monitor Widget is activated, the Printer Status window appears on
Dashboard.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
277
Printer Status Message Area
Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE:
•The Status Monitor Widget obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be
specified in Preferences. Also, the printer status is refreshed when Dashboard appears or
Preferences is closed.
•If the Status Monitor Widget receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get
printer information is displayed.
•When the printer is connected via USB cable, you cannot check the status of the printer during a
print or scan job.
Printer Status Image Area
Displays the image of printer condition.
•Estimated Toner Level image
Displays the estimated toner level of each color if the printer is functioning properly.
NOTE:
•If the utility does not receive a response from the printer, the Unknown toner image is
displayed.
•Printer error image
Displays an indication image when an error occurs.
When this image is displayed, the printer cannot be used.
Order Supplies Button
Displays the Order window.
To hide the Order window, click Order Supplies again.
278
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Info (i) Button
Opens Preferences.
NOTE:
•The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the
Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.
Order Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies online or by
phone.
To open the Order window:
Click Order Supplies in the Printer Status window.
NOTE:
•The Order window appears when low toner is detected.
Order Online
• Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site. hyperlink
Displays the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies.
•URL list
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies.
Select a URL address to use when the Visit Dell printer supplies ordering web site
hyperlink is clicked.
Order By Phone
•Phone number list
Displays a list of available phone numbers that you can call to order Dell printer
supplies.
• Update phone contacts when rebooting check box
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.
Dell and the Environment
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
279
Preferences
To open Preferences:
Click the info (i) button in the Printer Status window.
NOTE:
•The info (i) button appears on the lower-right corner of the window when the cursor is over the
Printer Status window. The info (i) button is a standard used across all widgets.
Printer
Displays a list of available printer names in the pull down menu. The first printer
displayed in this list is set as default.
Status Update Interval
You can specify the update interval of the printer status. By default, it is set to obtain the
printer information every 10 seconds.
SNMP Community Name
You can change the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) community name if
using default community name (public). Up to 31 characters can be entered.
Service Tag Button
Click this button to obtain the service tag.
NOTE:
•You cannot retrieve the service tag when the printer is connected via USB cable.
done Button
Click this button to return to the Printer Status window.
Using the Status Monitor Console for Linux
Status Monitor Console is a printer utility that promotes efficient use of the printer
through the exchange of information between the Linux and the printer.
Status Monitor Console
•Monitoring Dell Printers
Allows you to check the status of Dell printers currently connected to your Linux.
•Receiving Alerts
Alerts you to problems, such as paper jams or low toner.
•Ordering Supplies
Allows you to access the web site to order supplies.
280
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Before Installing the Status Monitor Console
NOTE:
•The Status Monitor Console requires the following modules installed.
- Python, PyGTK, Net-SNMP, cups-libs, and xdg-open
Make sure that these modules are installed before you install the Status Monitor Console.
•The Status Monitor Console is available when the printer is connected to a network (LPR or Socket
9100). USB connection is not supported.
Distributions
•Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop
•SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11
•Ubuntu 12.04 LTS
Printing System
•Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS)
Installing the Status Monitor Console
1Activate the terminal, and then log in as a super user.
2Enter the following rpm command in the terminal window.
For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop and SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11:
For Ubuntu 12.04 LTS:
Starting the Status Monitor Console
1Click Dell Printers Status Monitor Console
See "Printer Selection Window."
2Select the printer.
See "Printer Status Window."
Printer Selection Window
# rpm -ivh (Type the package file name)
# dpkg -i (Type the package file name)
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
281
Printers List
All the printers registered in the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS) are displayed in a
list.
•Status icons:
Ready
Unknown/Offline/Toner Low/Paper Low
Door Open/Paper Jam/No Toner/Out Of Paper
Settings Button
Opens the Settings window.
Details Button
Opens the Printer Status window. If a non-supported printer is selected, it opens the
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool."
Refresh Button
Updates the information of printers.
Close Button
Closes the Printer Selection window.
Printer Status Window
When the printer is specified in the Printer Selection window, the Printer Status window
appears.
Printer Status Message Area
Displays a message of the current printer status.
NOTE:
•The Status Monitor Console obtains the printer information at the updated interval that can be
specified in the Settings window. To refresh the printer status, click Refresh.
•If the Status Monitor Console receives no response from the printer, the message Cannot get
printer information is displayed.
282
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Printer Status Image Area
•Current Toner Status icons
Displays icons of the current status of each toner.
The toner level is more than 30%.
The toner level is less than 29%.
The toner level is less than 9%.
The toner level is unknown.
•Estimated Toner Level images
Informs about the amount of toner that remains for each color.
Toner Alert
Displays an alert message when any remaining toner is low, empty, or unknown.
Order Online
• Order Supplies Online button
Displays the web site for ordering Dell printer supplies. This button appears when the
amount of toners becomes less than 30%.
Refresh Button
Updates the status of the printer.
Close Button
Closes the Printer Status window.
Dell Supplies Management System Window
This window provides you with the information for ordering printer supplies by
telephone or from the web site.
To open the Dell Supplies Management System window:
Click Order Supplies Online in the Printer Status window.
OR
Click Dell Printers Dell Supplies Management System.
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
283
Select Printer Model
Select the printer model name.
Order Online
• Order Supplies Online button
–When the Regular URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:
Displays Service Tag window.
–When the Premier URL is selected in the Select Reorder URL:
Displays the procurement and support web site.
•Select Reorder URL
Displays a list of available URLs where you can order Dell printer supplies. Select a
URL address to use when the Order Supplies Online button is clicked.
–Regular URL: http://accessories.us.dell.com/sna/PrinterSeg.aspx
–Premier URL: http://premier.dell.com
Order by Phone
• To order Dell printer supplies by phone, call the following
Select your country with phone number from the list, and then call the displayed
telephone number.
• Update phone contacts when rebooting check box
Select this check box to regularly update the phone number list.
Dell and the Environment
Click the hyperlink to access the web site about recycling.
Close Button
Closes the Dell Supplies Management System window.
284
| Understanding the Software of Your Printer
Service Tag Window
Enter the Dell printer service tag.
NOTE:
•For details about the service tag, see "Express Service Code and Service Tag."
Settings Window
Click Settings in the Printer Selection window.
Update of status
• Printer Status is regularly updated check box
Select the check box to enable the printer status to be updated by the specified
interval.
• Update interval text box
Specify the update interval of the printer status.
Port Number Settings
•Port Number
Specify the port number in the Port Number text box to open the setting page of the
printer in a web browser.
Protocol Settings - SNMP
•Community Name
Enter the Community name of SNMP in the Community Name text box.
Order URL
•Select Reorder URL
Understanding the Software of Your Printer |
285
The selected URL address is set as default web site for the Select Reorder URL in the
Dell Supplies Management System window.
Software Update
Software, driver, and firmware updates can be downloaded from the Dell Support web
site located at www.dell.com/support.
286
| User Authentication
User Authentication
Using the user authentication setting, it is possible to create and manage up to 18 user
accounts secured with a password. Each user of the accounts can customize the Home
screen and save the changes.
You can select the user authentication method from either local authentication or
remote authentication. To use the remote authentication method, the LDAP or Kerberos
server is required to authenticate the user.
To select the user authentication method, see "Desktop Login" or "Desktop
Authentication."
It is also possible to associate NFC (Near Field Communication) capable ID Cards to user
account. When an ID card is associated with a user account, you can login to that user
account by tapping the ID card to the NFC reader, or waving the ID card over the NFC
reader.
NOTE:
•The printer supports the following card types:
-MIFARE
®
Ultralight
- MIFARE Standard (Classic) 1K
- MIFARE Standard (Classic) 4K
•The NFC feature is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•The portal screen is available when you select the local authentication.
•Remote authentication is available for Dell S2825cdn only.
Creating and Editing the User Accounts
To use user authentication, you must first create a user account.
Creating a New User Account
1Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
NOTE:
•If other account was created and specified as Initial Login, the Home screen of the
account appears.
2Tap .
If Panel Lock Control is set to Enable, enter the password. See "Panel Lock."
3Tap OK.
The printer enters the edit mode, and Add Account is displayed in the portal screen.
NOTE:
•In the edit mode, each tile except Add Account has .
4Enter the account name, tap Done, and then select the tile color.
You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.
User Authentication |
287
5Tap Next.
6Enter the account password and NFC ID.
To display the Home screen of your account when you turn on the printer, select the
Initial Login check box.
NOTE:
•If no account is specified as Initial Login, the portal screen is displayed when you turn on
the printer.
•You can create a new account without setting the account password and NFC ID.
•When the NFC Authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed. NFC Authentication is
available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•When you use UID as the NFC ID, enter the hexadecimal characters. The characters A to F
should be entered in the capital letters.
7Tap Done Done.
Editing the User Account
1Tap in the portal screen.
2Tap OK.
3Tap the account tile you want to edit.
4Edit the account name, tile color, password, NFC ID, or Initial Login.
NOTE:
•When the NFC authentication is disabled, NFC ID is not displayed. NFC Authentication is
available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
5Tap Done.
Deleting the User Account
1Tap in the portal screen.
2Tap OK.
3Tap and hold the account tile you want to delete.
4Drag the tile to .
5Tap OK.
Logging In to the User Account
There are two ways to log in to the account. One is to log in using the touch panel, and
Guest
Print
Account Settings 1/2
Guest
Preview
Back Next
Account Name
Preview
Tile C o lor
288
| User Authentication
the other is to log in using the NFC authentication card.
NOTE:
•NFC Authentication is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
Logging In Using the Touch Panel
1Start the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
2Tap the account tile you want to log in to.
NOTE:
•When the account you want to log in to does not require a password, skip step 3. The Home
screen is displayed.
3Enter the account password, and then tap Login.
Logging In Using the NFC Authentication Card
NOTE:
•NFC Authentication is available on Dell H625cdw and Dell H825cdw.
•To use the NFC authentication card, the following settings are required:
- Enable the NFC authentication setting in Secure Settings of the operator panel. See "NFC
Authentication."
- Register your user account to the printer. See "Creating a New User Account."
1Turn on the printer and wait until the portal screen is displayed.
NOTE:
•The NFC authentication is available only when the portal screen is displayed.
2Wave the card over the NFC reader on the printer.
Logging In Using the Local Authentication or Remote
Authentication
Specifying the User Authentication Method
Use the operator panel menu or the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. For details
about how to specify the user authentication method, see "Desktop Login" or "Desktop
Authentication."
Preparations for Remote Authentication
To use the remote authentication method, the printer needs to be specified so that the
printer can access to the LDAP or Kerberos server, and that the users need to be
registered to the Server Address Book. For details, see "Using the Server Address Book
and Server Phone Book" and "Using the Address Book and Phone Book."
Logging In for Remote Authentication
The Sign in screen is displayed when the printer is turned on while the printer is
specified to use the remote authentication method.
Enter the login name and password registered in the LDAP or Kerberos server to log in to
the printer.
User Authentication |
289
Logging Out
When there is an account which is specified as Initial Login, the Home screen of the
account is always displayed after the printer is turned on. To log in to another account,
you need to log out first.
1Press the (Log In/Out) button.
290
| Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization
The Home screen is like a desktop of your computer and customizable to suit your
preference or work style.
For example, you can gather only the tiles you often use, or rearrange the tiles so that
you can easily access the tiles you often use.
The tiles on the Home screen can be the shortcuts to the jobs to be performed on the
printer, like "taking seven copies of the handouts for the weekly meeting in two-sided
color copy" or "scanning the document and sending the scanned data to my boss by
e-mail." If you create a tile for a job with such job settings, the printer changes the
settings of the printer as you specified just by tapping the tile.
Adding a New Tile
You can select and add the tile from the pre-defined tiles, or you can create a new
customized tile which includes specific settings for copy, fax, scan or print. Up to 28 tiles
can be placed in your Home screen.
You can also add tiles to each of the copy, print, scan, and fax group screen that is
displayed when tapping the icons in the Dock Menu. Up to 8 tiles can be placed in each
group screen.
NOTE:
•If a tile is added to the Home screen, it will also be added to the relevant group screen. If a tile is
added to a group screen, it will also be added to the Home screen.
Selecting From the Pre-defined Tiles
The printer offers the pre-defined tiles which include the default job settings.
1On the Home screen or group screen, tap Add App.
NOTE:
•If the maximum number of tiles have been reached in a group screen, the tiles relevant to the
group is not displayed in the list.
2Tap the tile you want to add to your Home screen or group screen.
is displayed on the upper-right of the tile when you add the tile in your Home
screen.
Creating a New Tile Including the Job Settings
You may often use the same settings to copy a certain document, for example. You can
create the tile including those job settings and save it in your Home screen.
Dell
Document
Hub
Print
PDF/TIFF
Copy
Fax
Home Guest
Multiple Desktop - Tile Customization |
291
Creating Your Custom Tile
The following explanation is an example to create your custom tile for copying.
To create custom tiles for other jobs such as faxing, scanning, or printing, follow the
same procedures on the job settings screen of each job.
1Tap the Copy tile in your Home screen.
2Tap the setting tiles and change the copy options as needed.
See "Copy."
3Tap .
4Tap the text box, and then enter the name of your settings.
5Tap the color tile you want to set as your custom tile.
NOTE:
•You can preview the image of your custom tile in Preview.
6Tap Save As.
NOTE:
•When a tile has the Lock icon, that function is controlled by the Functions Control setting. To
enable the function, you need to enter the password. See "Functions Control."
•When you save the job settings for Fax or Scan to Email as a custom tile, recipient information
is saved together with the settings. To prevent from sending faxes or e-mails to wrong recipients,
make sure that the fax numbers or e-mail addresses of the recipients displayed on the touch panel
are correct.
To prevent others from using customized tiles with personal information, log out from your user
account after you finish using the printer.
Editing Your Custom Tile
You can edit the job settings saved in your custom tile.
1Tap the tile you want to edit in your Home screen or group screen.
2Change the job settings as needed.
3Tap .
4Tap the text box to name your settings if you want to rename your settings.
5Tap the color tile if you want to change the color of the tile.
6Tap Save.
NOTE:
•If you tap Save As instead, the new tile is added in your Home screen.
Moving or Deleting Your Tiles
You can move or delete your tiles from your Home screen or group screen.
See "Moving, Adding or Deleting the Tiles."
292
| Using the Address Book and Phone Book
Using the Address Book and Phone Book
There are several address books available for Scan and Fax functions. Address books help
you organize contact information, such as e-mail addresses, fax numbers and server
information, and quickly choose the recipient or locate the address. The address book
data can be obtained from the printer or a remote LDAP server.
NOTE:
•Phone Book is described as one of Address Books in this section.
•For details about how to setup the LDAP server, see "LDAP Server" and "LDAP User Mapping." For
details about how to obtain e-mail addresses and fax numbers from LDAP servers, see "Using the
Server Address Book and Server Phone Book."
Types of Address Books
•E-mail Address Book (for Scan to Email)
E-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned data via e-mail
•E-mail Group (for Scan to Email)
Groups of e-mail addresses registered for sending the scanned data via e-mail
•LDAP Server Address Book (for Scan to Email)
E-mail addresses registered in the LDAP server for sending the scanned data via
e-mail
•Network Address Book
(for Scan to Network Folder)
Computer and FTP server information registered for sending the scanned data to a
computer or ftp server
•Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from the printer
•Group Dial (for Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from the printer
•LDAP Server Phone Book (for Fax)
Fax numbers registered in the LDAP server for sending scanned data from the printer
•PC Fax Address Book (for Direct Fax)
Fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from your computer
•PC Fax Address Book for group (for Direct Fax)
Groups of fax numbers registered for sending scanned data from your computer
Adding and Editing Entries to the Address Books
There are following three ways to add or edit entries to the address books:
•Operator panel of the printer
•Address Book Editor
•Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
Using the Address Book and Phone Book |
293
( : supported, Blank: not supported)
Using Operator Panel of the Printer
You can directly enter the fax numbers on the operator panel.
NOTE:
•For details about how to add a new entry, see "Setting Speed Dial."
Using Address Book Editor
You can use Address Book Editor installed on your computer to add or edit entries.
Address Book Editor is synchronized with the address books of the printer and updated
simultaneously as you save changes to the entries in Address Book Editor.
NOTE:
•When the printer and your computer is connected via USB, you must install the scanner driver.
With Address Book Editor, you can:
•Retrieve data from the address books of the printer at startup.
•Synchronize with the printer.
•Import the Address Book data from CSV file, WAB file, MAPI, and LDAP server.
•Export the Address Book data into a CSV file.
NOTE:
•Do not edit the exported CSV file with programs other than the Address Book Editor. Editing
the CSV file with other programs may corrupt the address data.
Address Book Panel
There are two address books you can manage in the Address Book Editor: Device
Address Book for Fax, E-mail, and Server and PC Fax Address Book for Direct Fax.
Editing an Entry
1Select an Address Book that the entry you want to edit is stored.
Functions Features Types of Address
Books
Entry Method
Operator Panel
on the Printer
Address Book
Editor
Dell Printer
Configuration
Web Tool
Scan E-mail Address Book
E-mail Group
Server Address Book
(LDAP server)
Network Address Book
Fax Fax Phone Book
Group Dial
Server Phone Book
(LDAP server)
Direct Fax PC Fax Address Book
PC Fax Address Book
- group
294
| Using the Address Book and Phone Book
2Select an entry that you want to edit.
3Click Edit, and then enter new information.
4Click Save.
NOTE:
•When the address book entries are updated, it synchronizes with the printer and updates the
address books of the printer simultaneously.
Using Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
You can use Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool using a general web browser.
NOTE:
•For details about how to add a new entry, see "Address Book."
•When the address book entries are updated, the address books of the printer are also updated
simultaneously.
Using the Server Address Book and Server Phone Book
With the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, you can specify
an e-mail address or fax number of a recipient registered in the external LDAP server
when sending a scanned data with e-mail or fax.
To use the E-mail Server Address Book and the Fax Server Phone Book, the printer
needs to be configured in order to access the external LDAP server.
NOTE:
•To configure the settings of the external LDAP server, contact your system administrator.
Preparing the Printer to Access the External LDAP Server
Set the following items using the Dell™ Printer Configuration Web Tool.
•Authentication type
•LDAP Server
•LDAP User Mapping
Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
To start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool, enter the IP address of the printer in the
address bar of a web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, verify the IP address by using the
operator panel, printing the system settings report, or using the ping command. See
"Verifying the IP Settings."
Setting Authentication Type
1Click Print Server Settings the Security tab Authentication System.
Using the Address Book and Phone Book |
295
2In the Authentication System Settings drop-down list box under Authentication
Type, select LDAP as the authentication method, and then click Apply New Settings.
NOTE:
•When the server you are accessing uses the Kerberos authentication, select Kerberos as the
authentication method. To set the information necessary to access the Kerberos server, enter
the information in Kerberos Server under the Security tab. See "Kerberos Server."
3Click Restart Printer.
Setting LDAP Server
NOTE:
•When SSL/TLS communication is required to access the LDAP server, select the Enable check box
for LDAP-SSL/TLS Communication in SSL/TLS under the Security tab. See "SSL/TLS."
1Click Print Server Settings the Security tab LDAP Server.
2In the IP Address/Host Name & Port text box under Server Information, enter IP
address or the host name, and the port number.
296
| Using the Address Book and Phone Book
The port number must be 389, 3268, or between 5000 and 65535.
NOTE:
•When LDAPS communication is required, set the port number to 636, and when you use the
global catalog, set the port number to 3269.
3Under Optional information, set the following items.
For details about configuring each item, contact your network administrator.
aIn the Search Directory Root text box, enter the search directory root.
bIn Login Credentials to Access LDAP Server, select credential used to access the
LDAP server.
cIn the Login Name text box, enter the login name.
dIn the Password text box, enter the login password using 1 to 127 alphanumeric
characters. If the password is left blank (NULL), you cannot log in to a server.
eIn the Re-enter Password text box, enter the login password again to check it.
fIn Search Time-Out, select Wait LDAP Server Limit if you want to follow the time
specified by the LDAP server. Select Wait if you want to specify the time.
gIn the Search Name Order drop-down list box, specify the search order.
hIn Server Address Book, select the check box if you want to enable the server
address book.
iIn Server Phone Book, select the check box if you want to enable the server
phone book.
4Click Apply New Settings.
5Click Restart Printer.
Setting LDAP User Mapping
1Click Print Server Settings the Security tab LDAP User Mapping.
2Specify the attribute names used in the LDAP server.
NOTE:
•If the attribute names are not customized in the LDAP server, leave the settings in this step as
they are by default.
3Click Apply New Settings.
4Click Restart Printer.
Using the Address Book and Phone Book |
297
Sending an E-mail With the Scanned Data Using the E-mail
Server Address Book
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Scan to Email.
3Tap Address Book.
4Tap Network Address Book.
5Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
6Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.
7Tap Send.
Sending a Fax Using the Fax Server Phone Book
1Press the (Home) button.
2Tap Fax.
3Tap Phone Book.
4Tap Network Phone Book.
5Enter a keyword using the keyboard, and then tap Search.
6Tap a recipient from the search result, and then tap Done.
7Tap Send.
298
| Using Digital Certificates
Using Digital Certificates
The authentication feature using digital certificates upgrades security when sending print
data or setting data.
This chapter describes how to manage digital certificates.
The printer supports the following digital certificate formats.
•PKCS#12
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI), Wi-Fi (WPA-Enterprise)
•PKCS#7 (for CSR)
HTTPS, IPsec (PKI)
NOTE:
•For details about digital certificate error, see "Understanding Printer Messages" and "Digital
Certificate Problems."
The following is a typical setup flow for using digital certificates.
Managing Certificates
This section describes how to manage digital certificates as follows:
•"Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication"
•"Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)"
•"Importing a Digital Certificate"
•"Setting a Digital Certificate"
•"Confirming the Settings of a Digital Certificate"
•"Deleting a Digital Certificate"
•"Exporting a Digital Certificate"
Preparing to Use HTTPS Communication
Before managing digital certificates, set HTTPS communication with a self-signed
certificate.
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings the Security tab SSL/TLS.
3Click Generate Self-Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.
Prepare to manage digital certificates.
•Set HTTPS Communication
Import and set digital certificates.
•Import a Digital Certificate
•Set a Digital Certificate
•Check the Settings of a Digital Certificate
Set various security features using digital certificates.
Using Digital Certificates |
299
4Select the size of public key from the list of Size of Public Key.
5Specify the issuer of SSL self-signed certificate.
6Click Generate Signed Certificate.
After the self-signed certificate is generated, the Restart Printer button appears.
7Click Restart Printer.
8Repeat steps 2 to 4.
The SSL/TLS page is displayed.
9When the self-signed certificate is set correctly, the HTTP- SSL/TLS Communication
column is set to Enable, select the Enable check box.
Creating and Downloading a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
NOTE:
•To download a CSR from the printer, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to
Use HTTPS Communication."
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings the Security tab SSL/TLS.
3Click Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
4Specify each item of certificate signing request.
5Click Apply New Settings.
6Check the settings of certificate signing request, and then click Download.
7Save a CSR file to your computer.
Use this CSR to receive a signed certificate from a trusted certificate authority.
Importing a Digital Certificate
CAUTION:
• Before importing a certificate file, backup the certificate file.
NOTE:
•To manage digital certificates, you must set up HTTPS communication. See "Preparing to Use
HTTPS Communication."
•Make sure to import the certificate with Internet Explorer.
•After importing a PKCS#12 format certificate, the secret key is not exported even if you execute
exporting.
1Start the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
See "Starting the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool."
2Click Print Server Settings the Security tab SSL/TLS.
3Click Upload Signed Certificate of Machine Digital Certificate.